1 @c Copyright (C) 1988,89,92,93,94,96,97,1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
2 @c This is part of the GCC manual.
3 @c For copying conditions, see the file gcc.texi.
6 @chapter Target Description Macros
7 @cindex machine description macros
8 @cindex target description macros
9 @cindex macros, target description
10 @cindex @file{tm.h} macros
12 In addition to the file @file{@var{machine}.md}, a machine description
13 includes a C header file conventionally given the name
14 @file{@var{machine}.h}. This header file defines numerous macros
15 that convey the information about the target machine that does not fit
16 into the scheme of the @file{.md} file. The file @file{tm.h} should be
17 a link to @file{@var{machine}.h}. The header file @file{config.h}
18 includes @file{tm.h} and most compiler source files include
22 * Driver:: Controlling how the driver runs the compilation passes.
23 * Run-time Target:: Defining @samp{-m} options like @samp{-m68000} and @samp{-m68020}.
24 * Storage Layout:: Defining sizes and alignments of data.
25 * Type Layout:: Defining sizes and properties of basic user data types.
26 * Registers:: Naming and describing the hardware registers.
27 * Register Classes:: Defining the classes of hardware registers.
28 * Stack and Calling:: Defining which way the stack grows and by how much.
29 * Varargs:: Defining the varargs macros.
30 * Trampolines:: Code set up at run time to enter a nested function.
31 * Library Calls:: Controlling how library routines are implicitly called.
32 * Addressing Modes:: Defining addressing modes valid for memory operands.
33 * Condition Code:: Defining how insns update the condition code.
34 * Costs:: Defining relative costs of different operations.
35 * Sections:: Dividing storage into text, data, and other sections.
36 * PIC:: Macros for position independent code.
37 * Assembler Format:: Defining how to write insns and pseudo-ops to output.
38 * Debugging Info:: Defining the format of debugging output.
39 * Cross-compilation:: Handling floating point for cross-compilers.
40 * Misc:: Everything else.
44 @section Controlling the Compilation Driver, @file{gcc}
46 @cindex controlling the compilation driver
48 @c prevent bad page break with this line
49 You can control the compilation driver.
52 @findex SWITCH_TAKES_ARG
53 @item SWITCH_TAKES_ARG (@var{char})
54 A C expression which determines whether the option @samp{-@var{char}}
55 takes arguments. The value should be the number of arguments that
56 option takes--zero, for many options.
58 By default, this macro is defined as
59 @code{DEFAULT_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG}, which handles the standard options
60 properly. You need not define @code{SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} unless you
61 wish to add additional options which take arguments. Any redefinition
62 should call @code{DEFAULT_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} and then check for
65 @findex WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG
66 @item WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG (@var{name})
67 A C expression which determines whether the option @samp{-@var{name}}
68 takes arguments. The value should be the number of arguments that
69 option takes--zero, for many options. This macro rather than
70 @code{SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} is used for multi-character option names.
72 By default, this macro is defined as
73 @code{DEFAULT_WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG}, which handles the standard options
74 properly. You need not define @code{WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} unless you
75 wish to add additional options which take arguments. Any redefinition
76 should call @code{DEFAULT_WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} and then check for
79 @findex SWITCH_CURTAILS_COMPILATION
80 @item SWITCH_CURTAILS_COMPILATION (@var{char})
81 A C expression which determines whether the option @samp{-@var{char}}
82 stops compilation before the generation of an executable. The value is
83 boolean, non-zero if the option does stop an executable from being
84 generated, zero otherwise.
86 By default, this macro is defined as
87 @code{DEFAULT_SWITCH_CURTAILS_COMPILATION}, which handles the standard
88 options properly. You need not define
89 @code{SWITCH_CURTAILS_COMPILATION} unless you wish to add additional
90 options which affect the generation of an executable. Any redefinition
91 should call @code{DEFAULT_SWITCH_CURTAILS_COMPILATION} and then check
92 for additional options.
94 @findex SWITCHES_NEED_SPACES
95 @item SWITCHES_NEED_SPACES
96 A string-valued C expression which enumerates the options for which
97 the linker needs a space between the option and its argument.
99 If this macro is not defined, the default value is @code{""}.
103 A C string constant that tells the GNU CC driver program options to
104 pass to CPP. It can also specify how to translate options you
105 give to GNU CC into options for GNU CC to pass to the CPP.
107 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
109 @findex NO_BUILTIN_SIZE_TYPE
110 @item NO_BUILTIN_SIZE_TYPE
111 If this macro is defined, the preprocessor will not define the builtin macro
112 @code{__SIZE_TYPE__}. The macro @code{__SIZE_TYPE__} must then be defined
113 by @code{CPP_SPEC} instead.
115 This should be defined if @code{SIZE_TYPE} depends on target dependent flags
116 which are not accessible to the preprocessor. Otherwise, it should not
119 @findex NO_BUILTIN_PTRDIFF_TYPE
120 @item NO_BUILTIN_PTRDIFF_TYPE
121 If this macro is defined, the preprocessor will not define the builtin macro
122 @code{__PTRDIFF_TYPE__}. The macro @code{__PTRDIFF_TYPE__} must then be
123 defined by @code{CPP_SPEC} instead.
125 This should be defined if @code{PTRDIFF_TYPE} depends on target dependent flags
126 which are not accessible to the preprocessor. Otherwise, it should not
129 @findex SIGNED_CHAR_SPEC
130 @item SIGNED_CHAR_SPEC
131 A C string constant that tells the GNU CC driver program options to
132 pass to CPP. By default, this macro is defined to pass the option
133 @samp{-D__CHAR_UNSIGNED__} to CPP if @code{char} will be treated as
134 @code{unsigned char} by @code{cc1}.
136 Do not define this macro unless you need to override the default
141 A C string constant that tells the GNU CC driver program options to
142 pass to @code{cc1}. It can also specify how to translate options you
143 give to GNU CC into options for GNU CC to pass to the @code{cc1}.
145 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
149 A C string constant that tells the GNU CC driver program options to
150 pass to @code{cc1plus}. It can also specify how to translate options you
151 give to GNU CC into options for GNU CC to pass to the @code{cc1plus}.
153 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
157 A C string constant that tells the GNU CC driver program options to
158 pass to the assembler. It can also specify how to translate options
159 you give to GNU CC into options for GNU CC to pass to the assembler.
160 See the file @file{sun3.h} for an example of this.
162 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
164 @findex ASM_FINAL_SPEC
166 A C string constant that tells the GNU CC driver program how to
167 run any programs which cleanup after the normal assembler.
168 Normally, this is not needed. See the file @file{mips.h} for
171 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
175 A C string constant that tells the GNU CC driver program options to
176 pass to the linker. It can also specify how to translate options you
177 give to GNU CC into options for GNU CC to pass to the linker.
179 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
183 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The difference
184 between the two is that @code{LIB_SPEC} is used at the end of the
185 command given to the linker.
187 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that
188 loads the standard C library from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
192 Another C string constant that tells the GNU CC driver program
193 how and when to place a reference to @file{libgcc.a} into the
194 linker command line. This constant is placed both before and after
195 the value of @code{LIB_SPEC}.
197 If this macro is not defined, the GNU CC driver provides a default that
198 passes the string @samp{-lgcc} to the linker unless the @samp{-shared}
201 @findex STARTFILE_SPEC
203 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
204 difference between the two is that @code{STARTFILE_SPEC} is used at
205 the very beginning of the command given to the linker.
207 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that loads the
208 standard C startup file from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
212 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
213 difference between the two is that @code{ENDFILE_SPEC} is used at
214 the very end of the command given to the linker.
216 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
220 Define this macro to provide additional specifications to put in the
221 @file{specs} file that can be used in various specifications like
224 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures,
225 containing a string constant, that defines the specification name, and a
226 string constant that provides the specification.
228 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
230 @code{EXTRA_SPECS} is useful when an architecture contains several
231 related targets, which have various @code{..._SPECS} which are similar
232 to each other, and the maintainer would like one central place to keep
235 For example, the PowerPC System V.4 targets use @code{EXTRA_SPECS} to
236 define either @code{_CALL_SYSV} when the System V calling sequence is
237 used or @code{_CALL_AIX} when the older AIX-based calling sequence is
240 The @file{config/rs6000/rs6000.h} target file defines:
243 #define EXTRA_SPECS \
244 @{ "cpp_sysv_default", CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT @},
246 #define CPP_SYS_DEFAULT ""
249 The @file{config/rs6000/sysv.h} target file defines:
253 "%@{posix: -D_POSIX_SOURCE @} \
254 %@{mcall-sysv: -D_CALL_SYSV @} %@{mcall-aix: -D_CALL_AIX @} \
255 %@{!mcall-sysv: %@{!mcall-aix: %(cpp_sysv_default) @}@} \
256 %@{msoft-float: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@} %@{mcpu=403: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@}"
258 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
259 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_SYSV"
262 while the @file{config/rs6000/eabiaix.h} target file defines
263 @code{CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT} as:
266 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
267 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_AIX"
270 @findex LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL
271 @item LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL
272 Define this macro if the driver program should find the library
273 @file{libgcc.a} itself and should not pass @samp{-L} options to the
274 linker. If you do not define this macro, the driver program will pass
275 the argument @samp{-lgcc} to tell the linker to do the search and will
276 pass @samp{-L} options to it.
278 @findex LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL_1
279 @item LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL_1
280 Define this macro if the driver program should find the library
281 @file{libgcc.a}. If you do not define this macro, the driver program will pass
282 the argument @samp{-lgcc} to tell the linker to do the search.
283 This macro is similar to @code{LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL}, except that it does
284 not affect @samp{-L} options.
286 @findex LINK_COMMAND_SPEC
287 @item LINK_COMMAND_SPEC
288 A C string constant giving the complete command line need to execute the
289 linker. When you do this, you will need to update your port each time a
290 change is made to the link command line within @file{gcc.c}. Therefore,
291 define this macro only if you need to completely redefine the command
292 line for invoking the linker and there is no other way to accomplish
295 @findex MULTILIB_DEFAULTS
296 @item MULTILIB_DEFAULTS
297 Define this macro as a C expression for the initializer of an array of
298 string to tell the driver program which options are defaults for this
299 target and thus do not need to be handled specially when using
300 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS}.
302 Do not define this macro if @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} is not defined in
303 the target makefile fragment or if none of the options listed in
304 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} are set by default.
305 @xref{Target Fragment}.
307 @findex RELATIVE_PREFIX_NOT_LINKDIR
308 @item RELATIVE_PREFIX_NOT_LINKDIR
309 Define this macro to tell @code{gcc} that it should only translate
310 a @samp{-B} prefix into a @samp{-L} linker option if the prefix
311 indicates an absolute file name.
313 @findex STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX
314 @item STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX
315 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
316 standard choice of @file{/usr/local/lib/gcc-lib/} as the default prefix to
317 try when searching for the executable files of the compiler.
319 @findex MD_EXEC_PREFIX
321 If defined, this macro is an additional prefix to try after
322 @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched
323 when the @samp{-b} option is used, or the compiler is built as a cross
326 @findex STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
327 @item STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
328 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
329 standard choice of @file{/usr/local/lib/} as the default prefix to
330 try when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
332 @findex MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
333 @item MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
334 If defined, this macro supplies an additional prefix to try after the
335 standard prefixes. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched when the
336 @samp{-b} option is used, or when the compiler is built as a cross
339 @findex MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
340 @item MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
341 If defined, this macro supplies yet another prefix to try after the
342 standard prefixes. It is not searched when the @samp{-b} option is
343 used, or when the compiler is built as a cross compiler.
345 @findex INIT_ENVIRONMENT
346 @item INIT_ENVIRONMENT
347 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to set environment
348 variables for programs called by the driver, such as the assembler and
349 loader. The driver passes the value of this macro to @code{putenv} to
350 initialize the necessary environment variables.
352 @findex LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR
353 @item LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR
354 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
355 standard choice of @file{/usr/local/include} as the default prefix to
356 try when searching for local header files. @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR}
357 comes before @code{SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR} in the search order.
359 Cross compilers do not use this macro and do not search either
360 @file{/usr/local/include} or its replacement.
362 @findex SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR
363 @item SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR
364 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to specify a
365 system-specific directory to search for header files before the standard
366 directory. @code{SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR} comes before
367 @code{STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR} in the search order.
369 Cross compilers do not use this macro and do not search the directory
372 @findex STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR
373 @item STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR
374 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
375 standard choice of @file{/usr/include} as the default prefix to
376 try when searching for header files.
378 Cross compilers do not use this macro and do not search either
379 @file{/usr/include} or its replacement.
381 @findex STANDARD_INCLUDE_COMPONENT
382 @item STANDARD_INCLUDE_COMPONENT
383 The ``component'' corresponding to @code{STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR}.
384 See @code{INCLUDE_DEFAULTS}, below, for the description of components.
385 If you do not define this macro, no component is used.
387 @findex INCLUDE_DEFAULTS
388 @item INCLUDE_DEFAULTS
389 Define this macro if you wish to override the entire default search path
390 for include files. For a native compiler, the default search path
391 usually consists of @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR}, @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR},
392 @code{SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR}, @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}, and
393 @code{STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR}. In addition, @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}
394 and @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR} are defined automatically by @file{Makefile},
395 and specify private search areas for GCC. The directory
396 @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR} is used only for C++ programs.
398 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures.
399 Each array element should have four elements: the directory name (a
400 string constant), the component name, and flag for C++-only directories,
401 and a flag showing that the includes in the directory don't need to be
402 wrapped in @code{extern @samp{C}} when compiling C++. Mark the end of
403 the array with a null element.
405 The component name denotes what GNU package the include file is part of,
406 if any, in all upper-case letters. For example, it might be @samp{GCC}
407 or @samp{BINUTILS}. If the package is part of the a vendor-supplied
408 operating system, code the component name as @samp{0}.
411 For example, here is the definition used for VAX/VMS:
414 #define INCLUDE_DEFAULTS \
416 @{ "GNU_GXX_INCLUDE:", "G++", 1, 1@}, \
417 @{ "GNU_CC_INCLUDE:", "GCC", 0, 0@}, \
418 @{ "SYS$SYSROOT:[SYSLIB.]", 0, 0, 0@}, \
425 Here is the order of prefixes tried for exec files:
429 Any prefixes specified by the user with @samp{-B}.
432 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
435 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{COMPILER_PATH}.
438 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}.
441 @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}.
444 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
447 Here is the order of prefixes tried for startfiles:
451 Any prefixes specified by the user with @samp{-B}.
454 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
457 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{LIBRARY_PATH}
458 (native only, cross compilers do not use this).
461 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}.
464 @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}.
467 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
470 The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, if any.
473 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}.
482 @node Run-time Target
483 @section Run-time Target Specification
484 @cindex run-time target specification
485 @cindex predefined macros
486 @cindex target specifications
488 @c prevent bad page break with this line
489 Here are run-time target specifications.
492 @findex CPP_PREDEFINES
494 Define this to be a string constant containing @samp{-D} options to
495 define the predefined macros that identify this machine and system.
496 These macros will be predefined unless the @samp{-ansi} option is
499 In addition, a parallel set of macros are predefined, whose names are
500 made by appending @samp{__} at the beginning and at the end. These
501 @samp{__} macros are permitted by the ANSI standard, so they are
502 predefined regardless of whether @samp{-ansi} is specified.
504 For example, on the Sun, one can use the following value:
507 "-Dmc68000 -Dsun -Dunix"
510 The result is to define the macros @code{__mc68000__}, @code{__sun__}
511 and @code{__unix__} unconditionally, and the macros @code{mc68000},
512 @code{sun} and @code{unix} provided @samp{-ansi} is not specified.
514 @findex extern int target_flags
515 @item extern int target_flags;
516 This declaration should be present.
518 @cindex optional hardware or system features
519 @cindex features, optional, in system conventions
521 This series of macros is to allow compiler command arguments to
522 enable or disable the use of optional features of the target machine.
523 For example, one machine description serves both the 68000 and
524 the 68020; a command argument tells the compiler whether it should
525 use 68020-only instructions or not. This command argument works
526 by means of a macro @code{TARGET_68020} that tests a bit in
529 Define a macro @code{TARGET_@var{featurename}} for each such option.
530 Its definition should test a bit in @code{target_flags}; for example:
533 #define TARGET_68020 (target_flags & 1)
536 One place where these macros are used is in the condition-expressions
537 of instruction patterns. Note how @code{TARGET_68020} appears
538 frequently in the 68000 machine description file, @file{m68k.md}.
539 Another place they are used is in the definitions of the other
540 macros in the @file{@var{machine}.h} file.
542 @findex TARGET_SWITCHES
543 @item TARGET_SWITCHES
544 This macro defines names of command options to set and clear
545 bits in @code{target_flags}. Its definition is an initializer
546 with a subgrouping for each command option.
548 Each subgrouping contains a string constant, that defines the option
549 name, a number, which contains the bits to set in
550 @code{target_flags}, and a second string which is the description
551 displayed by --help. If the number is negative then the bits specified
552 by the number are cleared instead of being set. If the description
553 string is present but empty, then no help information will be displayed
554 for that option, but it will not count as an undocumented option. The
555 actual option name is made by appending @samp{-m} to the specified name.
557 One of the subgroupings should have a null string. The number in
558 this grouping is the default value for @code{target_flags}. Any
559 target options act starting with that value.
561 Here is an example which defines @samp{-m68000} and @samp{-m68020}
562 with opposite meanings, and picks the latter as the default:
565 #define TARGET_SWITCHES \
566 @{ @{ "68020", 1, "" @}, \
567 @{ "68000", -1, "Compile for the 68000" @}, \
571 @findex TARGET_OPTIONS
573 This macro is similar to @code{TARGET_SWITCHES} but defines names of command
574 options that have values. Its definition is an initializer with a
575 subgrouping for each command option.
577 Each subgrouping contains a string constant, that defines the fixed part
578 of the option name, the address of a variable, and a description string.
579 The variable, type @code{char *}, is set to the variable part of the
580 given option if the fixed part matches. The actual option name is made
581 by appending @samp{-m} to the specified name.
583 Here is an example which defines @samp{-mshort-data-@var{number}}. If the
584 given option is @samp{-mshort-data-512}, the variable @code{m88k_short_data}
585 will be set to the string @code{"512"}.
588 extern char *m88k_short_data;
589 #define TARGET_OPTIONS \
590 @{ @{ "short-data-", &m88k_short_data, "Specify the size of the short data section" @} @}
593 @findex TARGET_VERSION
595 This macro is a C statement to print on @code{stderr} a string
596 describing the particular machine description choice. Every machine
597 description should define @code{TARGET_VERSION}. For example:
601 #define TARGET_VERSION \
602 fprintf (stderr, " (68k, Motorola syntax)");
604 #define TARGET_VERSION \
605 fprintf (stderr, " (68k, MIT syntax)");
609 @findex OVERRIDE_OPTIONS
610 @item OVERRIDE_OPTIONS
611 Sometimes certain combinations of command options do not make sense on
612 a particular target machine. You can define a macro
613 @code{OVERRIDE_OPTIONS} to take account of this. This macro, if
614 defined, is executed once just after all the command options have been
617 Don't use this macro to turn on various extra optimizations for
618 @samp{-O}. That is what @code{OPTIMIZATION_OPTIONS} is for.
620 @findex OPTIMIZATION_OPTIONS
621 @item OPTIMIZATION_OPTIONS (@var{level}, @var{size})
622 Some machines may desire to change what optimizations are performed for
623 various optimization levels. This macro, if defined, is executed once
624 just after the optimization level is determined and before the remainder
625 of the command options have been parsed. Values set in this macro are
626 used as the default values for the other command line options.
628 @var{level} is the optimization level specified; 2 if @samp{-O2} is
629 specified, 1 if @samp{-O} is specified, and 0 if neither is specified.
631 @var{size} is non-zero if @samp{-Os} is specified and zero otherwise.
633 You should not use this macro to change options that are not
634 machine-specific. These should uniformly selected by the same
635 optimization level on all supported machines. Use this macro to enable
636 machine-specific optimizations.
638 @strong{Do not examine @code{write_symbols} in
639 this macro!} The debugging options are not supposed to alter the
642 @findex CAN_DEBUG_WITHOUT_FP
643 @item CAN_DEBUG_WITHOUT_FP
644 Define this macro if debugging can be performed even without a frame
645 pointer. If this macro is defined, GNU CC will turn on the
646 @samp{-fomit-frame-pointer} option whenever @samp{-O} is specified.
650 @section Storage Layout
651 @cindex storage layout
653 Note that the definitions of the macros in this table which are sizes or
654 alignments measured in bits do not need to be constant. They can be C
655 expressions that refer to static variables, such as the @code{target_flags}.
656 @xref{Run-time Target}.
659 @findex BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
660 @item BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
661 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant bit in a
662 byte has the lowest number; otherwise define it to have the value zero.
663 This means that bit-field instructions count from the most significant
664 bit. If the machine has no bit-field instructions, then this must still
665 be defined, but it doesn't matter which value it is defined to. This
666 macro need not be a constant.
668 This macro does not affect the way structure fields are packed into
669 bytes or words; that is controlled by @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN}.
671 @findex BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
672 @item BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
673 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant byte in a
674 word has the lowest number. This macro need not be a constant.
676 @findex WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
677 @item WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
678 Define this macro to have the value 1 if, in a multiword object, the
679 most significant word has the lowest number. This applies to both
680 memory locations and registers; GNU CC fundamentally assumes that the
681 order of words in memory is the same as the order in registers. This
682 macro need not be a constant.
684 @findex LIBGCC2_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
685 @item LIBGCC2_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
686 Define this macro if WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN is not constant. This must be a
687 constant value with the same meaning as WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN, which will be
688 used only when compiling libgcc2.c. Typically the value will be set
689 based on preprocessor defines.
691 @findex FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
692 @item FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
693 Define this macro to have the value 1 if @code{DFmode}, @code{XFmode} or
694 @code{TFmode} floating point numbers are stored in memory with the word
695 containing the sign bit at the lowest address; otherwise define it to
696 have the value 0. This macro need not be a constant.
698 You need not define this macro if the ordering is the same as for
701 @findex BITS_PER_UNIT
703 Define this macro to be the number of bits in an addressable storage
704 unit (byte); normally 8.
706 @findex BITS_PER_WORD
708 Number of bits in a word; normally 32.
710 @findex MAX_BITS_PER_WORD
711 @item MAX_BITS_PER_WORD
712 Maximum number of bits in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
713 @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
714 largest value that @code{BITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
716 @findex UNITS_PER_WORD
718 Number of storage units in a word; normally 4.
720 @findex MIN_UNITS_PER_WORD
721 @item MIN_UNITS_PER_WORD
722 Minimum number of units in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
723 @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
724 smallest value that @code{UNITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
728 Width of a pointer, in bits. You must specify a value no wider than the
729 width of @code{Pmode}. If it is not equal to the width of @code{Pmode},
730 you must define @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED}.
732 @findex POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
733 @item POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
734 A C expression whose value is nonzero if pointers that need to be
735 extended from being @code{POINTER_SIZE} bits wide to @code{Pmode} are to
736 be zero-extended and zero if they are to be sign-extended.
738 You need not define this macro if the @code{POINTER_SIZE} is equal
739 to the width of @code{Pmode}.
742 @item PROMOTE_MODE (@var{m}, @var{unsignedp}, @var{type})
743 A macro to update @var{m} and @var{unsignedp} when an object whose type
744 is @var{type} and which has the specified mode and signedness is to be
745 stored in a register. This macro is only called when @var{type} is a
748 On most RISC machines, which only have operations that operate on a full
749 register, define this macro to set @var{m} to @code{word_mode} if
750 @var{m} is an integer mode narrower than @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. In most
751 cases, only integer modes should be widened because wider-precision
752 floating-point operations are usually more expensive than their narrower
755 For most machines, the macro definition does not change @var{unsignedp}.
756 However, some machines, have instructions that preferentially handle
757 either signed or unsigned quantities of certain modes. For example, on
758 the DEC Alpha, 32-bit loads from memory and 32-bit add instructions
759 sign-extend the result to 64 bits. On such machines, set
760 @var{unsignedp} according to which kind of extension is more efficient.
762 Do not define this macro if it would never modify @var{m}.
764 @findex PROMOTE_FUNCTION_ARGS
765 @item PROMOTE_FUNCTION_ARGS
766 Define this macro if the promotion described by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}
767 should also be done for outgoing function arguments.
769 @findex PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN
770 @item PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN
771 Define this macro if the promotion described by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}
772 should also be done for the return value of functions.
774 If this macro is defined, @code{FUNCTION_VALUE} must perform the same
775 promotions done by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}.
777 @findex PROMOTE_FOR_CALL_ONLY
778 @item PROMOTE_FOR_CALL_ONLY
779 Define this macro if the promotion described by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}
780 should @emph{only} be performed for outgoing function arguments or
781 function return values, as specified by @code{PROMOTE_FUNCTION_ARGS}
782 and @code{PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN}, respectively.
784 @findex PARM_BOUNDARY
786 Normal alignment required for function parameters on the stack, in
787 bits. All stack parameters receive at least this much alignment
788 regardless of data type. On most machines, this is the same as the
791 @findex STACK_BOUNDARY
793 Define this macro if you wish to preserve a certain alignment for
794 the stack pointer. The definition is a C expression
795 for the desired alignment (measured in bits).
797 @cindex @code{PUSH_ROUNDING}, interaction with @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}
798 If @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} is not defined, the stack will always be aligned
799 to the specified boundary. If @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} is defined and specifies a
800 less strict alignment than @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}, the stack may be
801 momentarily unaligned while pushing arguments.
803 @findex FUNCTION_BOUNDARY
804 @item FUNCTION_BOUNDARY
805 Alignment required for a function entry point, in bits.
807 @findex BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
808 @item BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
809 Biggest alignment that any data type can require on this machine, in bits.
811 @findex MINIMUM_ATOMIC_ALIGNMENT
812 @item MINIMUM_ATOMIC_ALIGNMENT
813 If defined, the smallest alignment, in bits, that can be given to an
814 object that can be referenced in one operation, without disturbing any
815 nearby object. Normally, this is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}, but may be larger
816 on machines that don't have byte or half-word store operations.
818 @findex BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT
819 @item BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT
820 Biggest alignment that any structure field can require on this machine,
821 in bits. If defined, this overrides @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} for
822 structure fields only.
824 @findex ADJUST_FIELD_ALIGN
825 @item ADJUST_FIELD_ALIGN (@var{field}, @var{computed})
826 An expression for the alignment of a structure field @var{field} if the
827 alignment computed in the usual way is @var{computed}. GNU CC uses
828 this value instead of the value in @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} or
829 @code{BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT}, if defined, for structure fields only.
831 @findex MAX_OFILE_ALIGNMENT
832 @item MAX_OFILE_ALIGNMENT
833 Biggest alignment supported by the object file format of this machine.
834 Use this macro to limit the alignment which can be specified using the
835 @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct. If not defined,
836 the default value is @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
838 @findex DATA_ALIGNMENT
839 @item DATA_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
840 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variables in
841 the static store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
842 the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
843 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
845 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
848 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
849 make it all fit in fewer cache lines. Another is to cause character
850 arrays to be word-aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
851 constants to character arrays can be done inline.
853 @findex CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT
854 @item CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT (@var{constant}, @var{basic-align})
855 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment given to a constant
856 that is being placed in memory. @var{constant} is the constant and
857 @var{basic-align} is the alignment that the object would ordinarily
858 have. The value of this macro is used instead of that alignment to
861 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
863 The typical use of this macro is to increase alignment for string
864 constants to be word aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
865 constants can be done inline.
867 @findex EMPTY_FIELD_BOUNDARY
868 @item EMPTY_FIELD_BOUNDARY
869 Alignment in bits to be given to a structure bit field that follows an
870 empty field such as @code{int : 0;}.
872 Note that @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} also affects the alignment
873 that results from an empty field.
875 @findex STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY
876 @item STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY
877 Number of bits which any structure or union's size must be a multiple of.
878 Each structure or union's size is rounded up to a multiple of this.
880 If you do not define this macro, the default is the same as
881 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
883 @findex STRICT_ALIGNMENT
884 @item STRICT_ALIGNMENT
885 Define this macro to be the value 1 if instructions will fail to work
886 if given data not on the nominal alignment. If instructions will merely
887 go slower in that case, define this macro as 0.
889 @findex PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS
890 @item PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS
891 Define this if you wish to imitate the way many other C compilers handle
892 alignment of bitfields and the structures that contain them.
894 The behavior is that the type written for a bitfield (@code{int},
895 @code{short}, or other integer type) imposes an alignment for the
896 entire structure, as if the structure really did contain an ordinary
897 field of that type. In addition, the bitfield is placed within the
898 structure so that it would fit within such a field, not crossing a
901 Thus, on most machines, a bitfield whose type is written as @code{int}
902 would not cross a four-byte boundary, and would force four-byte
903 alignment for the whole structure. (The alignment used may not be four
904 bytes; it is controlled by the other alignment parameters.)
906 If the macro is defined, its definition should be a C expression;
907 a nonzero value for the expression enables this behavior.
909 Note that if this macro is not defined, or its value is zero, some
910 bitfields may cross more than one alignment boundary. The compiler can
911 support such references if there are @samp{insv}, @samp{extv}, and
912 @samp{extzv} insns that can directly reference memory.
914 The other known way of making bitfields work is to define
915 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} as large as @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
916 Then every structure can be accessed with fullwords.
918 Unless the machine has bitfield instructions or you define
919 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} that way, you must define
920 @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} to have a nonzero value.
922 If your aim is to make GNU CC use the same conventions for laying out
923 bitfields as are used by another compiler, here is how to investigate
924 what the other compiler does. Compile and run this program:
943 printf ("Size of foo1 is %d\n",
944 sizeof (struct foo1));
945 printf ("Size of foo2 is %d\n",
946 sizeof (struct foo2));
951 If this prints 2 and 5, then the compiler's behavior is what you would
952 get from @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS}.
954 @findex BITFIELD_NBYTES_LIMITED
955 @item BITFIELD_NBYTES_LIMITED
956 Like PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS except that its effect is limited to
957 aligning a bitfield within the structure.
959 @findex ROUND_TYPE_SIZE
960 @item ROUND_TYPE_SIZE (@var{struct}, @var{size}, @var{align})
961 Define this macro as an expression for the overall size of a structure
962 (given by @var{struct} as a tree node) when the size computed from the
963 fields is @var{size} and the alignment is @var{align}.
965 The default is to round @var{size} up to a multiple of @var{align}.
967 @findex ROUND_TYPE_ALIGN
968 @item ROUND_TYPE_ALIGN (@var{struct}, @var{computed}, @var{specified})
969 Define this macro as an expression for the alignment of a structure
970 (given by @var{struct} as a tree node) if the alignment computed in the
971 usual way is @var{computed} and the alignment explicitly specified was
974 The default is to use @var{specified} if it is larger; otherwise, use
975 the smaller of @var{computed} and @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}
977 @findex MAX_FIXED_MODE_SIZE
978 @item MAX_FIXED_MODE_SIZE
979 An integer expression for the size in bits of the largest integer
980 machine mode that should actually be used. All integer machine modes of
981 this size or smaller can be used for structures and unions with the
982 appropriate sizes. If this macro is undefined, @code{GET_MODE_BITSIZE
983 (DImode)} is assumed.
985 @findex STACK_SAVEAREA_MODE
986 @item STACK_SAVEAREA_MODE (@var{save_level})
987 If defined, an expression of type @code{enum machine_mode} that
988 specifies the mode of the save area operand of a
989 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
990 @var{save_level} is one of @code{SAVE_BLOCK}, @code{SAVE_FUNCTION}, or
991 @code{SAVE_NONLOCAL} and selects which of the three named patterns is
992 having its mode specified.
994 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{Pmode}. You
995 would most commonly define this macro if the
996 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} patterns need to support both a 32- and a
999 @findex STACK_SIZE_MODE
1000 @item STACK_SIZE_MODE
1001 If defined, an expression of type @code{enum machine_mode} that
1002 specifies the mode of the size increment operand of an
1003 @code{allocate_stack} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1005 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{word_mode}.
1006 You would most commonly define this macro if the @code{allocate_stack}
1007 pattern needs to support both a 32- and a 64-bit mode.
1009 @findex CHECK_FLOAT_VALUE
1010 @item CHECK_FLOAT_VALUE (@var{mode}, @var{value}, @var{overflow})
1011 A C statement to validate the value @var{value} (of type
1012 @code{double}) for mode @var{mode}. This means that you check whether
1013 @var{value} fits within the possible range of values for mode
1014 @var{mode} on this target machine. The mode @var{mode} is always
1015 a mode of class @code{MODE_FLOAT}. @var{overflow} is nonzero if
1016 the value is already known to be out of range.
1018 If @var{value} is not valid or if @var{overflow} is nonzero, you should
1019 set @var{overflow} to 1 and then assign some valid value to @var{value}.
1020 Allowing an invalid value to go through the compiler can produce
1021 incorrect assembler code which may even cause Unix assemblers to crash.
1023 This macro need not be defined if there is no work for it to do.
1025 @findex TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT
1026 @item TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT
1027 A code distinguishing the floating point format of the target machine.
1028 There are three defined values:
1031 @findex IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
1032 @item IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
1033 This code indicates IEEE floating point. It is the default; there is no
1034 need to define this macro when the format is IEEE.
1036 @findex VAX_FLOAT_FORMAT
1037 @item VAX_FLOAT_FORMAT
1038 This code indicates the peculiar format used on the Vax.
1040 @findex UNKNOWN_FLOAT_FORMAT
1041 @item UNKNOWN_FLOAT_FORMAT
1042 This code indicates any other format.
1045 The value of this macro is compared with @code{HOST_FLOAT_FORMAT}
1046 (@pxref{Config}) to determine whether the target machine has the same
1047 format as the host machine. If any other formats are actually in use on
1048 supported machines, new codes should be defined for them.
1050 The ordering of the component words of floating point values stored in
1051 memory is controlled by @code{FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} for the target
1052 machine and @code{HOST_FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} for the host.
1054 @findex DEFAULT_VTABLE_THUNKS
1055 @item DEFAULT_VTABLE_THUNKS
1056 GNU CC supports two ways of implementing C++ vtables: traditional or with
1057 so-called ``thunks''. The flag @samp{-fvtable-thunk} chooses between them.
1058 Define this macro to be a C expression for the default value of that flag.
1059 If @code{DEFAULT_VTABLE_THUNKS} is 0, GNU CC uses the traditional
1060 implementation by default. The ``thunk'' implementation is more efficient
1061 (especially if you have provided an implementation of
1062 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK}, see @ref{Function Entry}), but is not binary
1063 compatible with code compiled using the traditional implementation.
1064 If you are writing a new ports, define @code{DEFAULT_VTABLE_THUNKS} to 1.
1066 If you do not define this macro, the default for @samp{-fvtable-thunk} is 0.
1070 @section Layout of Source Language Data Types
1072 These macros define the sizes and other characteristics of the standard
1073 basic data types used in programs being compiled. Unlike the macros in
1074 the previous section, these apply to specific features of C and related
1075 languages, rather than to fundamental aspects of storage layout.
1078 @findex INT_TYPE_SIZE
1080 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{int} on the
1081 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1083 @findex MAX_INT_TYPE_SIZE
1084 @item MAX_INT_TYPE_SIZE
1085 Maximum number for the size in bits of the type @code{int} on the target
1086 machine. If this is undefined, the default is @code{INT_TYPE_SIZE}.
1087 Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the largest value that
1088 @code{INT_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time. This is used in @code{cpp}.
1090 @findex SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
1091 @item SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
1092 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short} on the
1093 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is half a word.
1094 (If this would be less than one storage unit, it is rounded up to one
1097 @findex LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1098 @item LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1099 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long} on the
1100 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1102 @findex MAX_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1103 @item MAX_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1104 Maximum number for the size in bits of the type @code{long} on the
1105 target machine. If this is undefined, the default is
1106 @code{LONG_TYPE_SIZE}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
1107 largest value that @code{LONG_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time. This is
1110 @findex LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1111 @item LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1112 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long} on the
1113 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1114 words. If you want to support GNU Ada on your machine, the value of
1115 macro must be at least 64.
1117 @findex CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1118 @item CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1119 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{char} on the
1120 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one quarter
1121 of a word. (If this would be less than one storage unit, it is rounded up
1124 @findex MAX_CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1125 @item MAX_CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1126 Maximum number for the size in bits of the type @code{char} on the
1127 target machine. If this is undefined, the default is
1128 @code{CHAR_TYPE_SIZE}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
1129 largest value that @code{CHAR_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time. This is
1132 @findex FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
1133 @item FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
1134 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{float} on the
1135 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1137 @findex DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1138 @item DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1139 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{double} on the
1140 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1143 @findex LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1144 @item LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1145 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long double} on
1146 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1149 @findex WIDEST_HARDWARE_FP_SIZE
1150 @item WIDEST_HARDWARE_FP_SIZE
1151 A C expression for the size in bits of the widest floating-point format
1152 supported by the hardware. If you define this macro, you must specify a
1153 value less than or equal to the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}.
1154 If you do not define this macro, the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}
1157 @findex DEFAULT_SIGNED_CHAR
1158 @item DEFAULT_SIGNED_CHAR
1159 An expression whose value is 1 or 0, according to whether the type
1160 @code{char} should be signed or unsigned by default. The user can
1161 always override this default with the options @samp{-fsigned-char}
1162 and @samp{-funsigned-char}.
1164 @findex DEFAULT_SHORT_ENUMS
1165 @item DEFAULT_SHORT_ENUMS
1166 A C expression to determine whether to give an @code{enum} type
1167 only as many bytes as it takes to represent the range of possible values
1168 of that type. A nonzero value means to do that; a zero value means all
1169 @code{enum} types should be allocated like @code{int}.
1171 If you don't define the macro, the default is 0.
1175 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1176 for size values. The typedef name @code{size_t} is defined using the
1177 contents of the string.
1179 The string can contain more than one keyword. If so, separate them with
1180 spaces, and write first any length keyword, then @code{unsigned} if
1181 appropriate, and finally @code{int}. The string must exactly match one
1182 of the data type names defined in the function
1183 @code{init_decl_processing} in the file @file{c-decl.c}. You may not
1184 omit @code{int} or change the order---that would cause the compiler to
1187 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long unsigned
1190 @findex PTRDIFF_TYPE
1192 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1193 for the result of subtracting two pointers. The typedef name
1194 @code{ptrdiff_t} is defined using the contents of the string. See
1195 @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1197 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long int"}.
1201 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1202 for wide characters. The typedef name @code{wchar_t} is defined using
1203 the contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1206 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"int"}.
1208 @findex WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1209 @item WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1210 A C expression for the size in bits of the data type for wide
1211 characters. This is used in @code{cpp}, which cannot make use of
1214 @findex MAX_WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1215 @item MAX_WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1216 Maximum number for the size in bits of the data type for wide
1217 characters. If this is undefined, the default is
1218 @code{WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
1219 largest value that @code{WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time. This is
1222 @findex OBJC_INT_SELECTORS
1223 @item OBJC_INT_SELECTORS
1224 Define this macro if the type of Objective C selectors should be
1227 If this macro is not defined, then selectors should have the type
1228 @code{struct objc_selector *}.
1230 @findex OBJC_SELECTORS_WITHOUT_LABELS
1231 @item OBJC_SELECTORS_WITHOUT_LABELS
1232 Define this macro if the compiler can group all the selectors together
1233 into a vector and use just one label at the beginning of the vector.
1234 Otherwise, the compiler must give each selector its own assembler
1237 On certain machines, it is important to have a separate label for each
1238 selector because this enables the linker to eliminate duplicate selectors.
1242 A C constant expression for the integer value for escape sequence
1247 @findex TARGET_NEWLINE
1250 @itemx TARGET_NEWLINE
1251 C constant expressions for the integer values for escape sequences
1252 @samp{\b}, @samp{\t} and @samp{\n}.
1260 C constant expressions for the integer values for escape sequences
1261 @samp{\v}, @samp{\f} and @samp{\r}.
1265 @section Register Usage
1266 @cindex register usage
1268 This section explains how to describe what registers the target machine
1269 has, and how (in general) they can be used.
1271 The description of which registers a specific instruction can use is
1272 done with register classes; see @ref{Register Classes}. For information
1273 on using registers to access a stack frame, see @ref{Frame Registers}.
1274 For passing values in registers, see @ref{Register Arguments}.
1275 For returning values in registers, see @ref{Scalar Return}.
1278 * Register Basics:: Number and kinds of registers.
1279 * Allocation Order:: Order in which registers are allocated.
1280 * Values in Registers:: What kinds of values each reg can hold.
1281 * Leaf Functions:: Renumbering registers for leaf functions.
1282 * Stack Registers:: Handling a register stack such as 80387.
1283 * Obsolete Register Macros:: Macros formerly used for the 80387.
1286 @node Register Basics
1287 @subsection Basic Characteristics of Registers
1289 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1290 Registers have various characteristics.
1293 @findex FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1294 @item FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1295 Number of hardware registers known to the compiler. They receive
1296 numbers 0 through @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER-1}; thus, the first
1297 pseudo register's number really is assigned the number
1298 @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
1300 @item FIXED_REGISTERS
1301 @findex FIXED_REGISTERS
1302 @cindex fixed register
1303 An initializer that says which registers are used for fixed purposes
1304 all throughout the compiled code and are therefore not available for
1305 general allocation. These would include the stack pointer, the frame
1306 pointer (except on machines where that can be used as a general
1307 register when no frame pointer is needed), the program counter on
1308 machines where that is considered one of the addressable registers,
1309 and any other numbered register with a standard use.
1311 This information is expressed as a sequence of numbers, separated by
1312 commas and surrounded by braces. The @var{n}th number is 1 if
1313 register @var{n} is fixed, 0 otherwise.
1315 The table initialized from this macro, and the table initialized by
1316 the following one, may be overridden at run time either automatically,
1317 by the actions of the macro @code{CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}, or by
1318 the user with the command options @samp{-ffixed-@var{reg}},
1319 @samp{-fcall-used-@var{reg}} and @samp{-fcall-saved-@var{reg}}.
1321 @findex CALL_USED_REGISTERS
1322 @item CALL_USED_REGISTERS
1323 @cindex call-used register
1324 @cindex call-clobbered register
1325 @cindex call-saved register
1326 Like @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} but has 1 for each register that is
1327 clobbered (in general) by function calls as well as for fixed
1328 registers. This macro therefore identifies the registers that are not
1329 available for general allocation of values that must live across
1332 If a register has 0 in @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS}, the compiler
1333 automatically saves it on function entry and restores it on function
1334 exit, if the register is used within the function.
1336 @findex CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE
1338 @findex call_used_regs
1339 @item CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE
1340 Zero or more C statements that may conditionally modify two variables
1341 @code{fixed_regs} and @code{call_used_regs} (both of type @code{char
1342 []}) after they have been initialized from the two preceding macros.
1344 This is necessary in case the fixed or call-clobbered registers depend
1347 You need not define this macro if it has no work to do.
1349 @cindex disabling certain registers
1350 @cindex controlling register usage
1351 If the usage of an entire class of registers depends on the target
1352 flags, you may indicate this to GCC by using this macro to modify
1353 @code{fixed_regs} and @code{call_used_regs} to 1 for each of the
1354 registers in the classes which should not be used by GCC. Also define
1355 the macro @code{REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER} to return @code{NO_REGS} if it
1356 is called with a letter for a class that shouldn't be used.
1358 (However, if this class is not included in @code{GENERAL_REGS} and all
1359 of the insn patterns whose constraints permit this class are
1360 controlled by target switches, then GCC will automatically avoid using
1361 these registers when the target switches are opposed to them.)
1363 @findex NON_SAVING_SETJMP
1364 @item NON_SAVING_SETJMP
1365 If this macro is defined and has a nonzero value, it means that
1366 @code{setjmp} and related functions fail to save the registers, or that
1367 @code{longjmp} fails to restore them. To compensate, the compiler
1368 avoids putting variables in registers in functions that use
1371 @findex INCOMING_REGNO
1372 @item INCOMING_REGNO (@var{out})
1373 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1374 expression returns the register number as seen by the called function
1375 corresponding to the register number @var{out} as seen by the calling
1376 function. Return @var{out} if register number @var{out} is not an
1379 @findex OUTGOING_REGNO
1380 @item OUTGOING_REGNO (@var{in})
1381 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1382 expression returns the register number as seen by the calling function
1383 corresponding to the register number @var{in} as seen by the called
1384 function. Return @var{in} if register number @var{in} is not an inbound
1390 If the program counter has a register number, define this as that
1391 register number. Otherwise, do not define it.
1395 @node Allocation Order
1396 @subsection Order of Allocation of Registers
1397 @cindex order of register allocation
1398 @cindex register allocation order
1400 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1401 Registers are allocated in order.
1404 @findex REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1405 @item REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1406 If defined, an initializer for a vector of integers, containing the
1407 numbers of hard registers in the order in which GNU CC should prefer
1408 to use them (from most preferred to least).
1410 If this macro is not defined, registers are used lowest numbered first
1411 (all else being equal).
1413 One use of this macro is on machines where the highest numbered
1414 registers must always be saved and the save-multiple-registers
1415 instruction supports only sequences of consecutive registers. On such
1416 machines, define @code{REG_ALLOC_ORDER} to be an initializer that lists
1417 the highest numbered allocable register first.
1419 @findex ORDER_REGS_FOR_LOCAL_ALLOC
1420 @item ORDER_REGS_FOR_LOCAL_ALLOC
1421 A C statement (sans semicolon) to choose the order in which to allocate
1422 hard registers for pseudo-registers local to a basic block.
1424 Store the desired register order in the array @code{reg_alloc_order}.
1425 Element 0 should be the register to allocate first; element 1, the next
1426 register; and so on.
1428 The macro body should not assume anything about the contents of
1429 @code{reg_alloc_order} before execution of the macro.
1431 On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
1434 @node Values in Registers
1435 @subsection How Values Fit in Registers
1437 This section discusses the macros that describe which kinds of values
1438 (specifically, which machine modes) each register can hold, and how many
1439 consecutive registers are needed for a given mode.
1442 @findex HARD_REGNO_NREGS
1443 @item HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1444 A C expression for the number of consecutive hard registers, starting
1445 at register number @var{regno}, required to hold a value of mode
1448 On a machine where all registers are exactly one word, a suitable
1449 definition of this macro is
1452 #define HARD_REGNO_NREGS(REGNO, MODE) \
1453 ((GET_MODE_SIZE (MODE) + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) \
1457 @findex ALTER_HARD_SUBREG
1458 @item ALTER_HARD_SUBREG (@var{tgt_mode}, @var{word}, @var{src_mode}, @var{regno})
1459 A C expression that returns an adjusted hard register number for
1462 (subreg:@var{tgt_mode} (reg:@var{src_mode} @var{regno}) @var{word})
1465 This may be needed if the target machine has mixed sized big-endian
1466 registers, like Sparc v9.
1468 @findex HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK
1469 @item HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1470 A C expression that is nonzero if it is permissible to store a value
1471 of mode @var{mode} in hard register number @var{regno} (or in several
1472 registers starting with that one). For a machine where all registers
1473 are equivalent, a suitable definition is
1476 #define HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK(REGNO, MODE) 1
1479 You need not include code to check for the numbers of fixed registers,
1480 because the allocation mechanism considers them to be always occupied.
1482 @cindex register pairs
1483 On some machines, double-precision values must be kept in even/odd
1484 register pairs. You can implement that by defining this macro to reject
1485 odd register numbers for such modes.
1487 The minimum requirement for a mode to be OK in a register is that the
1488 @samp{mov@var{mode}} instruction pattern support moves between the
1489 register and other hard register in the same class and that moving a
1490 value into the register and back out not alter it.
1492 Since the same instruction used to move @code{word_mode} will work for
1493 all narrower integer modes, it is not necessary on any machine for
1494 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} to distinguish between these modes, provided
1495 you define patterns @samp{movhi}, etc., to take advantage of this. This
1496 is useful because of the interaction between @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}
1497 and @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P}; it is very desirable for all integer modes
1500 Many machines have special registers for floating point arithmetic.
1501 Often people assume that floating point machine modes are allowed only
1502 in floating point registers. This is not true. Any registers that
1503 can hold integers can safely @emph{hold} a floating point machine
1504 mode, whether or not floating arithmetic can be done on it in those
1505 registers. Integer move instructions can be used to move the values.
1507 On some machines, though, the converse is true: fixed-point machine
1508 modes may not go in floating registers. This is true if the floating
1509 registers normalize any value stored in them, because storing a
1510 non-floating value there would garble it. In this case,
1511 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} should reject fixed-point machine modes in
1512 floating registers. But if the floating registers do not automatically
1513 normalize, if you can store any bit pattern in one and retrieve it
1514 unchanged without a trap, then any machine mode may go in a floating
1515 register, so you can define this macro to say so.
1517 The primary significance of special floating registers is rather that
1518 they are the registers acceptable in floating point arithmetic
1519 instructions. However, this is of no concern to
1520 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}. You handle it by writing the proper
1521 constraints for those instructions.
1523 On some machines, the floating registers are especially slow to access,
1524 so that it is better to store a value in a stack frame than in such a
1525 register if floating point arithmetic is not being done. As long as the
1526 floating registers are not in class @code{GENERAL_REGS}, they will not
1527 be used unless some pattern's constraint asks for one.
1529 @findex MODES_TIEABLE_P
1530 @item MODES_TIEABLE_P (@var{mode1}, @var{mode2})
1531 A C expression that is nonzero if a value of mode
1532 @var{mode1} is accessible in mode @var{mode2} without copying.
1534 If @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{r}, @var{mode1})} and
1535 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{r}, @var{mode2})} are always the same for
1536 any @var{r}, then @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P (@var{mode1}, @var{mode2})}
1537 should be nonzero. If they differ for any @var{r}, you should define
1538 this macro to return zero unless some other mechanism ensures the
1539 accessibility of the value in a narrower mode.
1541 You should define this macro to return nonzero in as many cases as
1542 possible since doing so will allow GNU CC to perform better register
1545 @findex AVOID_CCMODE_COPIES
1546 @item AVOID_CCMODE_COPIES
1547 Define this macro if the compiler should avoid copies to/from @code{CCmode}
1548 registers. You should only define this macro if support fo copying to/from
1549 @code{CCmode} is incomplete.
1552 @node Leaf Functions
1553 @subsection Handling Leaf Functions
1555 @cindex leaf functions
1556 @cindex functions, leaf
1557 On some machines, a leaf function (i.e., one which makes no calls) can run
1558 more efficiently if it does not make its own register window. Often this
1559 means it is required to receive its arguments in the registers where they
1560 are passed by the caller, instead of the registers where they would
1563 The special treatment for leaf functions generally applies only when
1564 other conditions are met; for example, often they may use only those
1565 registers for its own variables and temporaries. We use the term ``leaf
1566 function'' to mean a function that is suitable for this special
1567 handling, so that functions with no calls are not necessarily ``leaf
1570 GNU CC assigns register numbers before it knows whether the function is
1571 suitable for leaf function treatment. So it needs to renumber the
1572 registers in order to output a leaf function. The following macros
1576 @findex LEAF_REGISTERS
1577 @item LEAF_REGISTERS
1578 A C initializer for a vector, indexed by hard register number, which
1579 contains 1 for a register that is allowable in a candidate for leaf
1582 If leaf function treatment involves renumbering the registers, then the
1583 registers marked here should be the ones before renumbering---those that
1584 GNU CC would ordinarily allocate. The registers which will actually be
1585 used in the assembler code, after renumbering, should not be marked with 1
1588 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize
1589 the treatment of leaf functions.
1591 @findex LEAF_REG_REMAP
1592 @item LEAF_REG_REMAP (@var{regno})
1593 A C expression whose value is the register number to which @var{regno}
1594 should be renumbered, when a function is treated as a leaf function.
1596 If @var{regno} is a register number which should not appear in a leaf
1597 function before renumbering, then the expression should yield -1, which
1598 will cause the compiler to abort.
1600 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize the
1601 treatment of leaf functions, and registers need to be renumbered to do
1605 @findex leaf_function
1606 Normally, @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must
1607 treat leaf functions specially. It can test the C variable
1608 @code{leaf_function} which is nonzero for leaf functions. (The variable
1609 @code{leaf_function} is defined only if @code{LEAF_REGISTERS} is
1611 @c changed this to fix overfull. ALSO: why the "it" at the beginning
1612 @c of the next paragraph?! --mew 2feb93
1614 @node Stack Registers
1615 @subsection Registers That Form a Stack
1617 There are special features to handle computers where some of the
1618 ``registers'' form a stack, as in the 80387 coprocessor for the 80386.
1619 Stack registers are normally written by pushing onto the stack, and are
1620 numbered relative to the top of the stack.
1622 Currently, GNU CC can only handle one group of stack-like registers, and
1623 they must be consecutively numbered.
1628 Define this if the machine has any stack-like registers.
1630 @findex FIRST_STACK_REG
1631 @item FIRST_STACK_REG
1632 The number of the first stack-like register. This one is the top
1635 @findex LAST_STACK_REG
1636 @item LAST_STACK_REG
1637 The number of the last stack-like register. This one is the bottom of
1641 @node Obsolete Register Macros
1642 @subsection Obsolete Macros for Controlling Register Usage
1644 These features do not work very well. They exist because they used to
1645 be required to generate correct code for the 80387 coprocessor of the
1646 80386. They are no longer used by that machine description and may be
1647 removed in a later version of the compiler. Don't use them!
1650 @findex OVERLAPPING_REGNO_P
1651 @item OVERLAPPING_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
1652 If defined, this is a C expression whose value is nonzero if hard
1653 register number @var{regno} is an overlapping register. This means a
1654 hard register which overlaps a hard register with a different number.
1655 (Such overlap is undesirable, but occasionally it allows a machine to
1656 be supported which otherwise could not be.) This macro must return
1657 nonzero for @emph{all} the registers which overlap each other. GNU CC
1658 can use an overlapping register only in certain limited ways. It can
1659 be used for allocation within a basic block, and may be spilled for
1660 reloading; that is all.
1662 If this macro is not defined, it means that none of the hard registers
1663 overlap each other. This is the usual situation.
1665 @findex INSN_CLOBBERS_REGNO_P
1666 @item INSN_CLOBBERS_REGNO_P (@var{insn}, @var{regno})
1667 If defined, this is a C expression whose value should be nonzero if
1668 the insn @var{insn} has the effect of mysteriously clobbering the
1669 contents of hard register number @var{regno}. By ``mysterious'' we
1670 mean that the insn's RTL expression doesn't describe such an effect.
1672 If this macro is not defined, it means that no insn clobbers registers
1673 mysteriously. This is the usual situation; all else being equal,
1674 it is best for the RTL expression to show all the activity.
1677 @findex PRESERVE_DEATH_INFO_REGNO_P
1678 @item PRESERVE_DEATH_INFO_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
1679 If defined, this is a C expression whose value is nonzero if correct
1680 @code{REG_DEAD} notes are needed for hard register number @var{regno}
1683 You would arrange to preserve death info for a register when some of the
1684 code in the machine description which is executed to write the assembler
1685 code looks at the death notes. This is necessary only when the actual
1686 hardware feature which GNU CC thinks of as a register is not actually a
1687 register of the usual sort. (It might, for example, be a hardware
1690 It is also useful for peepholes and linker relaxation.
1692 If this macro is not defined, it means that no death notes need to be
1693 preserved, and some may even be incorrect. This is the usual situation.
1696 @node Register Classes
1697 @section Register Classes
1698 @cindex register class definitions
1699 @cindex class definitions, register
1701 On many machines, the numbered registers are not all equivalent.
1702 For example, certain registers may not be allowed for indexed addressing;
1703 certain registers may not be allowed in some instructions. These machine
1704 restrictions are described to the compiler using @dfn{register classes}.
1706 You define a number of register classes, giving each one a name and saying
1707 which of the registers belong to it. Then you can specify register classes
1708 that are allowed as operands to particular instruction patterns.
1712 In general, each register will belong to several classes. In fact, one
1713 class must be named @code{ALL_REGS} and contain all the registers. Another
1714 class must be named @code{NO_REGS} and contain no registers. Often the
1715 union of two classes will be another class; however, this is not required.
1717 @findex GENERAL_REGS
1718 One of the classes must be named @code{GENERAL_REGS}. There is nothing
1719 terribly special about the name, but the operand constraint letters
1720 @samp{r} and @samp{g} specify this class. If @code{GENERAL_REGS} is
1721 the same as @code{ALL_REGS}, just define it as a macro which expands
1724 Order the classes so that if class @var{x} is contained in class @var{y}
1725 then @var{x} has a lower class number than @var{y}.
1727 The way classes other than @code{GENERAL_REGS} are specified in operand
1728 constraints is through machine-dependent operand constraint letters.
1729 You can define such letters to correspond to various classes, then use
1730 them in operand constraints.
1732 You should define a class for the union of two classes whenever some
1733 instruction allows both classes. For example, if an instruction allows
1734 either a floating point (coprocessor) register or a general register for a
1735 certain operand, you should define a class @code{FLOAT_OR_GENERAL_REGS}
1736 which includes both of them. Otherwise you will get suboptimal code.
1738 You must also specify certain redundant information about the register
1739 classes: for each class, which classes contain it and which ones are
1740 contained in it; for each pair of classes, the largest class contained
1743 When a value occupying several consecutive registers is expected in a
1744 certain class, all the registers used must belong to that class.
1745 Therefore, register classes cannot be used to enforce a requirement for
1746 a register pair to start with an even-numbered register. The way to
1747 specify this requirement is with @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}.
1749 Register classes used for input-operands of bitwise-and or shift
1750 instructions have a special requirement: each such class must have, for
1751 each fixed-point machine mode, a subclass whose registers can transfer that
1752 mode to or from memory. For example, on some machines, the operations for
1753 single-byte values (@code{QImode}) are limited to certain registers. When
1754 this is so, each register class that is used in a bitwise-and or shift
1755 instruction must have a subclass consisting of registers from which
1756 single-byte values can be loaded or stored. This is so that
1757 @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} can always have a possible value to return.
1760 @findex enum reg_class
1761 @item enum reg_class
1762 An enumeral type that must be defined with all the register class names
1763 as enumeral values. @code{NO_REGS} must be first. @code{ALL_REGS}
1764 must be the last register class, followed by one more enumeral value,
1765 @code{LIM_REG_CLASSES}, which is not a register class but rather
1766 tells how many classes there are.
1768 Each register class has a number, which is the value of casting
1769 the class name to type @code{int}. The number serves as an index
1770 in many of the tables described below.
1772 @findex N_REG_CLASSES
1774 The number of distinct register classes, defined as follows:
1777 #define N_REG_CLASSES (int) LIM_REG_CLASSES
1780 @findex REG_CLASS_NAMES
1781 @item REG_CLASS_NAMES
1782 An initializer containing the names of the register classes as C string
1783 constants. These names are used in writing some of the debugging dumps.
1785 @findex REG_CLASS_CONTENTS
1786 @item REG_CLASS_CONTENTS
1787 An initializer containing the contents of the register classes, as integers
1788 which are bit masks. The @var{n}th integer specifies the contents of class
1789 @var{n}. The way the integer @var{mask} is interpreted is that
1790 register @var{r} is in the class if @code{@var{mask} & (1 << @var{r})} is 1.
1792 When the machine has more than 32 registers, an integer does not suffice.
1793 Then the integers are replaced by sub-initializers, braced groupings containing
1794 several integers. Each sub-initializer must be suitable as an initializer
1795 for the type @code{HARD_REG_SET} which is defined in @file{hard-reg-set.h}.
1797 @findex REGNO_REG_CLASS
1798 @item REGNO_REG_CLASS (@var{regno})
1799 A C expression whose value is a register class containing hard register
1800 @var{regno}. In general there is more than one such class; choose a class
1801 which is @dfn{minimal}, meaning that no smaller class also contains the
1804 @findex BASE_REG_CLASS
1805 @item BASE_REG_CLASS
1806 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
1807 base register must belong. A base register is one used in an address
1808 which is the register value plus a displacement.
1810 @findex INDEX_REG_CLASS
1811 @item INDEX_REG_CLASS
1812 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
1813 index register must belong. An index register is one used in an
1814 address where its value is either multiplied by a scale factor or
1815 added to another register (as well as added to a displacement).
1817 @findex REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER
1818 @item REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER (@var{char})
1819 A C expression which defines the machine-dependent operand constraint
1820 letters for register classes. If @var{char} is such a letter, the
1821 value should be the register class corresponding to it. Otherwise,
1822 the value should be @code{NO_REGS}. The register letter @samp{r},
1823 corresponding to class @code{GENERAL_REGS}, will not be passed
1824 to this macro; you do not need to handle it.
1826 @findex REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P
1827 @item REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num})
1828 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
1829 suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses. It may be
1830 either a suitable hard register or a pseudo register that has been
1831 allocated such a hard register.
1833 @findex REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P
1834 @item REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
1835 A C expression that is just like @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except that
1836 that expression may examine the mode of the memory reference in
1837 @var{mode}. You should define this macro if the mode of the memory
1838 reference affects whether a register may be used as a base register. If
1839 you define this macro, the compiler will use it instead of
1840 @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}.
1842 @findex REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P
1843 @item REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (@var{num})
1844 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
1845 suitable for use as an index register in operand addresses. It may be
1846 either a suitable hard register or a pseudo register that has been
1847 allocated such a hard register.
1849 The difference between an index register and a base register is that
1850 the index register may be scaled. If an address involves the sum of
1851 two registers, neither one of them scaled, then either one may be
1852 labeled the ``base'' and the other the ``index''; but whichever
1853 labeling is used must fit the machine's constraints of which registers
1854 may serve in each capacity. The compiler will try both labelings,
1855 looking for one that is valid, and will reload one or both registers
1856 only if neither labeling works.
1858 @findex PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS
1859 @item PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{x}, @var{class})
1860 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
1861 to use when it is necessary to copy value @var{x} into a register in class
1862 @var{class}. The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps
1863 another, smaller class. On many machines, the following definition is
1867 #define PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS(X,CLASS) CLASS
1870 Sometimes returning a more restrictive class makes better code. For
1871 example, on the 68000, when @var{x} is an integer constant that is in range
1872 for a @samp{moveq} instruction, the value of this macro is always
1873 @code{DATA_REGS} as long as @var{class} includes the data registers.
1874 Requiring a data register guarantees that a @samp{moveq} will be used.
1876 If @var{x} is a @code{const_double}, by returning @code{NO_REGS}
1877 you can force @var{x} into a memory constant. This is useful on
1878 certain machines where immediate floating values cannot be loaded into
1879 certain kinds of registers.
1881 @findex PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
1882 @item PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{x}, @var{class})
1883 Like @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}, but for output reloads instead of
1884 input reloads. If you don't define this macro, the default is to use
1885 @var{class}, unchanged.
1887 @findex LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS
1888 @item LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{class})
1889 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
1890 to use when it is necessary to be able to hold a value of mode
1891 @var{mode} in a reload register for which class @var{class} would
1894 Unlike @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}, this macro should be used when
1895 there are certain modes that simply can't go in certain reload classes.
1897 The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps another,
1900 Don't define this macro unless the target machine has limitations which
1901 require the macro to do something nontrivial.
1903 @findex SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS
1904 @findex SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
1905 @findex SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
1906 @item SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
1907 @itemx SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
1908 @itemx SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
1909 Many machines have some registers that cannot be copied directly to or
1910 from memory or even from other types of registers. An example is the
1911 @samp{MQ} register, which on most machines, can only be copied to or
1912 from general registers, but not memory. Some machines allow copying all
1913 registers to and from memory, but require a scratch register for stores
1914 to some memory locations (e.g., those with symbolic address on the RT,
1915 and those with certain symbolic address on the Sparc when compiling
1916 PIC). In some cases, both an intermediate and a scratch register are
1919 You should define these macros to indicate to the reload phase that it may
1920 need to allocate at least one register for a reload in addition to the
1921 register to contain the data. Specifically, if copying @var{x} to a
1922 register @var{class} in @var{mode} requires an intermediate register,
1923 you should define @code{SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS} to return the
1924 largest register class all of whose registers can be used as
1925 intermediate registers or scratch registers.
1927 If copying a register @var{class} in @var{mode} to @var{x} requires an
1928 intermediate or scratch register, @code{SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS}
1929 should be defined to return the largest register class required. If the
1930 requirements for input and output reloads are the same, the macro
1931 @code{SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS} should be used instead of defining both
1934 The values returned by these macros are often @code{GENERAL_REGS}.
1935 Return @code{NO_REGS} if no spare register is needed; i.e., if @var{x}
1936 can be directly copied to or from a register of @var{class} in
1937 @var{mode} without requiring a scratch register. Do not define this
1938 macro if it would always return @code{NO_REGS}.
1940 If a scratch register is required (either with or without an
1941 intermediate register), you should define patterns for
1942 @samp{reload_in@var{m}} or @samp{reload_out@var{m}}, as required
1943 (@pxref{Standard Names}. These patterns, which will normally be
1944 implemented with a @code{define_expand}, should be similar to the
1945 @samp{mov@var{m}} patterns, except that operand 2 is the scratch
1948 Define constraints for the reload register and scratch register that
1949 contain a single register class. If the original reload register (whose
1950 class is @var{class}) can meet the constraint given in the pattern, the
1951 value returned by these macros is used for the class of the scratch
1952 register. Otherwise, two additional reload registers are required.
1953 Their classes are obtained from the constraints in the insn pattern.
1955 @var{x} might be a pseudo-register or a @code{subreg} of a
1956 pseudo-register, which could either be in a hard register or in memory.
1957 Use @code{true_regnum} to find out; it will return -1 if the pseudo is
1958 in memory and the hard register number if it is in a register.
1960 These macros should not be used in the case where a particular class of
1961 registers can only be copied to memory and not to another class of
1962 registers. In that case, secondary reload registers are not needed and
1963 would not be helpful. Instead, a stack location must be used to perform
1964 the copy and the @code{mov@var{m}} pattern should use memory as a
1965 intermediate storage. This case often occurs between floating-point and
1968 @findex SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED
1969 @item SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED (@var{class1}, @var{class2}, @var{m})
1970 Certain machines have the property that some registers cannot be copied
1971 to some other registers without using memory. Define this macro on
1972 those machines to be a C expression that is non-zero if objects of mode
1973 @var{m} in registers of @var{class1} can only be copied to registers of
1974 class @var{class2} by storing a register of @var{class1} into memory
1975 and loading that memory location into a register of @var{class2}.
1977 Do not define this macro if its value would always be zero.
1979 @findex SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX
1980 @item SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX (@var{mode})
1981 Normally when @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} is defined, the compiler
1982 allocates a stack slot for a memory location needed for register copies.
1983 If this macro is defined, the compiler instead uses the memory location
1984 defined by this macro.
1986 Do not define this macro if you do not define
1987 @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED}.
1989 @findex SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_MODE
1990 @item SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_MODE (@var{mode})
1991 When the compiler needs a secondary memory location to copy between two
1992 registers of mode @var{mode}, it normally allocates sufficient memory to
1993 hold a quantity of @code{BITS_PER_WORD} bits and performs the store and
1994 load operations in a mode that many bits wide and whose class is the
1995 same as that of @var{mode}.
1997 This is right thing to do on most machines because it ensures that all
1998 bits of the register are copied and prevents accesses to the registers
1999 in a narrower mode, which some machines prohibit for floating-point
2002 However, this default behavior is not correct on some machines, such as
2003 the DEC Alpha, that store short integers in floating-point registers
2004 differently than in integer registers. On those machines, the default
2005 widening will not work correctly and you must define this macro to
2006 suppress that widening in some cases. See the file @file{alpha.h} for
2009 Do not define this macro if you do not define
2010 @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} or if widening @var{mode} to a mode that
2011 is @code{BITS_PER_WORD} bits wide is correct for your machine.
2013 @findex SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES
2014 @item SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES
2015 Normally the compiler avoids choosing registers that have been
2016 explicitly mentioned in the rtl as spill registers (these registers are
2017 normally those used to pass parameters and return values). However,
2018 some machines have so few registers of certain classes that there
2019 would not be enough registers to use as spill registers if this were
2022 Define @code{SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES} to be an expression with a non-zero
2023 value on these machines. When this macro has a non-zero value, the
2024 compiler allows registers explicitly used in the rtl to be used as spill
2025 registers but avoids extending the lifetime of these registers.
2027 It is always safe to define this macro with a non-zero value, but if you
2028 unnecessarily define it, you will reduce the amount of optimizations
2029 that can be performed in some cases. If you do not define this macro
2030 with a non-zero value when it is required, the compiler will run out of
2031 spill registers and print a fatal error message. For most machines, you
2032 should not define this macro at all.
2034 @findex CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P
2035 @item CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P (@var{class})
2036 A C expression whose value is nonzero if pseudos that have been assigned
2037 to registers of class @var{class} would likely be spilled because
2038 registers of @var{class} are needed for spill registers.
2040 The default value of this macro returns 1 if @var{class} has exactly one
2041 register and zero otherwise. On most machines, this default should be
2042 used. Only define this macro to some other expression if pseudos
2043 allocated by @file{local-alloc.c} end up in memory because their hard
2044 registers were needed for spill registers. If this macro returns nonzero
2045 for those classes, those pseudos will only be allocated by
2046 @file{global.c}, which knows how to reallocate the pseudo to another
2047 register. If there would not be another register available for
2048 reallocation, you should not change the definition of this macro since
2049 the only effect of such a definition would be to slow down register
2052 @findex CLASS_MAX_NREGS
2053 @item CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})
2054 A C expression for the maximum number of consecutive registers
2055 of class @var{class} needed to hold a value of mode @var{mode}.
2057 This is closely related to the macro @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS}. In fact,
2058 the value of the macro @code{CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})}
2059 should be the maximum value of @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno},
2060 @var{mode})} for all @var{regno} values in the class @var{class}.
2062 This macro helps control the handling of multiple-word values
2065 @item CLASS_CANNOT_CHANGE_SIZE
2066 If defined, a C expression for a class that contains registers which the
2067 compiler must always access in a mode that is the same size as the mode
2068 in which it loaded the register.
2070 For the example, loading 32-bit integer or floating-point objects into
2071 floating-point registers on the Alpha extends them to 64-bits.
2072 Therefore loading a 64-bit object and then storing it as a 32-bit object
2073 does not store the low-order 32-bits, as would be the case for a normal
2074 register. Therefore, @file{alpha.h} defines this macro as
2078 Three other special macros describe which operands fit which constraint
2082 @findex CONST_OK_FOR_LETTER_P
2083 @item CONST_OK_FOR_LETTER_P (@var{value}, @var{c})
2084 A C expression that defines the machine-dependent operand constraint
2085 letters (@samp{I}, @samp{J}, @samp{K}, @dots{} @samp{P}) that specify
2086 particular ranges of integer values. If @var{c} is one of those
2087 letters, the expression should check that @var{value}, an integer, is in
2088 the appropriate range and return 1 if so, 0 otherwise. If @var{c} is
2089 not one of those letters, the value should be 0 regardless of
2092 @findex CONST_DOUBLE_OK_FOR_LETTER_P
2093 @item CONST_DOUBLE_OK_FOR_LETTER_P (@var{value}, @var{c})
2094 A C expression that defines the machine-dependent operand constraint
2095 letters that specify particular ranges of @code{const_double} values
2096 (@samp{G} or @samp{H}).
2098 If @var{c} is one of those letters, the expression should check that
2099 @var{value}, an RTX of code @code{const_double}, is in the appropriate
2100 range and return 1 if so, 0 otherwise. If @var{c} is not one of those
2101 letters, the value should be 0 regardless of @var{value}.
2103 @code{const_double} is used for all floating-point constants and for
2104 @code{DImode} fixed-point constants. A given letter can accept either
2105 or both kinds of values. It can use @code{GET_MODE} to distinguish
2106 between these kinds.
2108 @findex EXTRA_CONSTRAINT
2109 @item EXTRA_CONSTRAINT (@var{value}, @var{c})
2110 A C expression that defines the optional machine-dependent constraint
2111 letters (@samp{Q}, @samp{R}, @samp{S}, @samp{T}, @samp{U}) that can
2112 be used to segregate specific types of operands, usually memory
2113 references, for the target machine. Normally this macro will not be
2114 defined. If it is required for a particular target machine, it should
2115 return 1 if @var{value} corresponds to the operand type represented by
2116 the constraint letter @var{c}. If @var{c} is not defined as an extra
2117 constraint, the value returned should be 0 regardless of @var{value}.
2119 For example, on the ROMP, load instructions cannot have their output in r0 if
2120 the memory reference contains a symbolic address. Constraint letter
2121 @samp{Q} is defined as representing a memory address that does
2122 @emph{not} contain a symbolic address. An alternative is specified with
2123 a @samp{Q} constraint on the input and @samp{r} on the output. The next
2124 alternative specifies @samp{m} on the input and a register class that
2125 does not include r0 on the output.
2128 @node Stack and Calling
2129 @section Stack Layout and Calling Conventions
2130 @cindex calling conventions
2132 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2133 This describes the stack layout and calling conventions.
2141 * Register Arguments::
2143 * Aggregate Return::
2150 @subsection Basic Stack Layout
2151 @cindex stack frame layout
2152 @cindex frame layout
2154 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2155 Here is the basic stack layout.
2158 @findex STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2159 @item STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2160 Define this macro if pushing a word onto the stack moves the stack
2161 pointer to a smaller address.
2163 When we say, ``define this macro if @dots{},'' it means that the
2164 compiler checks this macro only with @code{#ifdef} so the precise
2165 definition used does not matter.
2167 @findex FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2168 @item FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2169 Define this macro if the addresses of local variable slots are at negative
2170 offsets from the frame pointer.
2172 @findex ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD
2173 @item ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD
2174 Define this macro if successive arguments to a function occupy decreasing
2175 addresses on the stack.
2177 @findex STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET
2178 @item STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET
2179 Offset from the frame pointer to the first local variable slot to be allocated.
2181 If @code{FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD}, find the next slot's offset by
2182 subtracting the first slot's length from @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET}.
2183 Otherwise, it is found by adding the length of the first slot to the
2184 value @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET}.
2185 @c i'm not sure if the above is still correct.. had to change it to get
2186 @c rid of an overfull. --mew 2feb93
2188 @findex STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
2189 @item STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
2190 Offset from the stack pointer register to the first location at which
2191 outgoing arguments are placed. If not specified, the default value of
2192 zero is used. This is the proper value for most machines.
2194 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2195 the first location at which outgoing arguments are placed.
2197 @findex FIRST_PARM_OFFSET
2198 @item FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2199 Offset from the argument pointer register to the first argument's
2200 address. On some machines it may depend on the data type of the
2203 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2204 the first argument's address.
2206 @findex STACK_DYNAMIC_OFFSET
2207 @item STACK_DYNAMIC_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2208 Offset from the stack pointer register to an item dynamically allocated
2209 on the stack, e.g., by @code{alloca}.
2211 The default value for this macro is @code{STACK_POINTER_OFFSET} plus the
2212 length of the outgoing arguments. The default is correct for most
2213 machines. See @file{function.c} for details.
2215 @findex DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS
2216 @item DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS (@var{frameaddr})
2217 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address in a stack
2218 frame where the pointer to the caller's frame is stored. Assume that
2219 @var{frameaddr} is an RTL expression for the address of the stack frame
2222 If you don't define this macro, the default is to return the value
2223 of @var{frameaddr}---that is, the stack frame address is also the
2224 address of the stack word that points to the previous frame.
2226 @findex SETUP_FRAME_ADDRESSES
2227 @item SETUP_FRAME_ADDRESSES
2228 If defined, a C expression that produces the machine-specific code to
2229 setup the stack so that arbitrary frames can be accessed. For example,
2230 on the Sparc, we must flush all of the register windows to the stack
2231 before we can access arbitrary stack frames. You will seldom need to
2234 @findex BUILTIN_SETJMP_FRAME_VALUE
2235 @item BUILTIN_SETJMP_FRAME_VALUE
2236 If defined, a C expression that contains an rtx that is used to store
2237 the address of the current frame into the built in @code{setjmp} buffer.
2238 The default value, @code{virtual_stack_vars_rtx}, is correct for most
2239 machines. One reason you may need to define this macro is if
2240 @code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} is the appropriate value on your machine.
2242 @findex RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2243 @item RETURN_ADDR_RTX (@var{count}, @var{frameaddr})
2244 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the return
2245 address for the frame @var{count} steps up from the current frame, after
2246 the prologue. @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer of the @var{count}
2247 frame, or the frame pointer of the @var{count} @minus{} 1 frame if
2248 @code{RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME} is defined.
2250 The value of the expression must always be the correct address when
2251 @var{count} is zero, but may be @code{NULL_RTX} if there is not way to
2252 determine the return address of other frames.
2254 @findex RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME
2255 @item RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME
2256 Define this if the return address of a particular stack frame is accessed
2257 from the frame pointer of the previous stack frame.
2259 @findex INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2260 @item INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2261 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the location of the
2262 incoming return address at the beginning of any function, before the
2263 prologue. This RTL is either a @code{REG}, indicating that the return
2264 value is saved in @samp{REG}, or a @code{MEM} representing a location in
2267 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2268 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2270 @findex INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET
2271 @item INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET
2272 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2273 from the value of the stack pointer register to the top of the stack
2274 frame at the beginning of any function, before the prologue. The top of
2275 the frame is defined to be the value of the stack pointer in the
2276 previous frame, just before the call instruction.
2278 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2279 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2281 @findex ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET
2282 @item ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET
2283 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2284 from the argument pointer to the canonical frame address (cfa). The
2285 final value should coincide with that calculated by
2286 @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}. Which is unfortunately not usable
2287 during virtual register instantiation.
2289 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2290 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2293 @node Stack Checking
2294 @subsection Specifying How Stack Checking is Done
2296 GNU CC will check that stack references are within the boundaries of
2297 the stack, if the @samp{-fstack-check} is specified, in one of three ways:
2301 If the value of the @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GNU CC
2302 will assume that you have arranged for stack checking to be done at
2303 appropriate places in the configuration files, e.g., in
2304 @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE}. GNU CC will do not other special processing.
2307 If @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} is zero and you defined a named pattern
2308 called @code{check_stack} in your @file{md} file, GNU CC will call that
2309 pattern with one argument which is the address to compare the stack
2310 value against. You must arrange for this pattern to report an error if
2311 the stack pointer is out of range.
2314 If neither of the above are true, GNU CC will generate code to periodically
2315 ``probe'' the stack pointer using the values of the macros defined below.
2318 Normally, you will use the default values of these macros, so GNU CC
2319 will use the third approach.
2322 @findex STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2323 @item STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2324 A nonzero value if stack checking is done by the configuration files in a
2325 machine-dependent manner. You should define this macro if stack checking
2326 is require by the ABI of your machine or if you would like to have to stack
2327 checking in some more efficient way than GNU CC's portable approach.
2328 The default value of this macro is zero.
2330 @findex STACK_CHECK_PROBE_INTERVAL
2331 @item STACK_CHECK_PROBE_INTERVAL
2332 An integer representing the interval at which GNU CC must generate stack
2333 probe instructions. You will normally define this macro to be no larger
2334 than the size of the ``guard pages'' at the end of a stack area. The
2335 default value of 4096 is suitable for most systems.
2337 @findex STACK_CHECK_PROBE_LOAD
2338 @item STACK_CHECK_PROBE_LOAD
2339 A integer which is nonzero if GNU CC should perform the stack probe
2340 as a load instruction and zero if GNU CC should use a store instruction.
2341 The default is zero, which is the most efficient choice on most systems.
2343 @findex STACK_CHECK_PROTECT
2344 @item STACK_CHECK_PROTECT
2345 The number of bytes of stack needed to recover from a stack overflow,
2346 for languages where such a recovery is supported. The default value of
2347 75 words should be adequate for most machines.
2349 @findex STACK_CHECK_MAX_FRAME_SIZE
2350 @item STACK_CHECK_MAX_FRAME_SIZE
2351 The maximum size of a stack frame, in bytes. GNU CC will generate probe
2352 instructions in non-leaf functions to ensure at least this many bytes of
2353 stack are available. If a stack frame is larger than this size, stack
2354 checking will not be reliable and GNU CC will issue a warning. The
2355 default is chosen so that GNU CC only generates one instruction on most
2356 systems. You should normally not change the default value of this macro.
2358 @findex STACK_CHECK_FIXED_FRAME_SIZE
2359 @item STACK_CHECK_FIXED_FRAME_SIZE
2360 GNU CC uses this value to generate the above warning message. It
2361 represents the amount of fixed frame used by a function, not including
2362 space for any callee-saved registers, temporaries and user variables.
2363 You need only specify an upper bound for this amount and will normally
2364 use the default of four words.
2366 @findex STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE
2367 @item STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE
2368 The maximum size, in bytes, of an object that GNU CC will place in the
2369 fixed area of the stack frame when the user specifies
2370 @samp{-fstack-check}.
2371 GNU CC computed the default from the values of the above macros and you will
2372 normally not need to override that default.
2376 @node Frame Registers
2377 @subsection Registers That Address the Stack Frame
2379 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2380 This discusses registers that address the stack frame.
2383 @findex STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
2384 @item STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
2385 The register number of the stack pointer register, which must also be a
2386 fixed register according to @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}. On most machines,
2387 the hardware determines which register this is.
2389 @findex FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2390 @item FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2391 The register number of the frame pointer register, which is used to
2392 access automatic variables in the stack frame. On some machines, the
2393 hardware determines which register this is. On other machines, you can
2394 choose any register you wish for this purpose.
2396 @findex HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2397 @item HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2398 On some machines the offset between the frame pointer and starting
2399 offset of the automatic variables is not known until after register
2400 allocation has been done (for example, because the saved registers are
2401 between these two locations). On those machines, define
2402 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} the number of a special, fixed register to
2403 be used internally until the offset is known, and define
2404 @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} to be the actual hard register number
2405 used for the frame pointer.
2407 You should define this macro only in the very rare circumstances when it
2408 is not possible to calculate the offset between the frame pointer and
2409 the automatic variables until after register allocation has been
2410 completed. When this macro is defined, you must also indicate in your
2411 definition of @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} how to eliminate
2412 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} into either @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}
2413 or @code{STACK_POINTER_REGNUM}.
2415 Do not define this macro if it would be the same as
2416 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}.
2418 @findex ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
2419 @item ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
2420 The register number of the arg pointer register, which is used to access
2421 the function's argument list. On some machines, this is the same as the
2422 frame pointer register. On some machines, the hardware determines which
2423 register this is. On other machines, you can choose any register you
2424 wish for this purpose. If this is not the same register as the frame
2425 pointer register, then you must mark it as a fixed register according to
2426 @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}, or arrange to be able to eliminate it
2427 (@pxref{Elimination}).
2429 @findex RETURN_ADDRESS_POINTER_REGNUM
2430 @item RETURN_ADDRESS_POINTER_REGNUM
2431 The register number of the return address pointer register, which is used to
2432 access the current function's return address from the stack. On some
2433 machines, the return address is not at a fixed offset from the frame
2434 pointer or stack pointer or argument pointer. This register can be defined
2435 to point to the return address on the stack, and then be converted by
2436 @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} into either the frame pointer or stack pointer.
2438 Do not define this macro unless there is no other way to get the return
2439 address from the stack.
2441 @findex STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM
2442 @findex STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM
2443 @item STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM
2444 @itemx STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM
2445 Register numbers used for passing a function's static chain pointer. If
2446 register windows are used, the register number as seen by the called
2447 function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM}, while the register
2448 number as seen by the calling function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM}. If
2449 these registers are the same, @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM} need
2450 not be defined.@refill
2452 The static chain register need not be a fixed register.
2454 If the static chain is passed in memory, these macros should not be
2455 defined; instead, the next two macros should be defined.
2457 @findex STATIC_CHAIN
2458 @findex STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING
2460 @itemx STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING
2461 If the static chain is passed in memory, these macros provide rtx giving
2462 @code{mem} expressions that denote where they are stored.
2463 @code{STATIC_CHAIN} and @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING} give the locations
2464 as seen by the calling and called functions, respectively. Often the former
2465 will be at an offset from the stack pointer and the latter at an offset from
2466 the frame pointer.@refill
2468 @findex stack_pointer_rtx
2469 @findex frame_pointer_rtx
2470 @findex arg_pointer_rtx
2471 The variables @code{stack_pointer_rtx}, @code{frame_pointer_rtx}, and
2472 @code{arg_pointer_rtx} will have been initialized prior to the use of these
2473 macros and should be used to refer to those items.
2475 If the static chain is passed in a register, the two previous macros should
2480 @subsection Eliminating Frame Pointer and Arg Pointer
2482 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2483 This is about eliminating the frame pointer and arg pointer.
2486 @findex FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED
2487 @item FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED
2488 A C expression which is nonzero if a function must have and use a frame
2489 pointer. This expression is evaluated in the reload pass. If its value is
2490 nonzero the function will have a frame pointer.
2492 The expression can in principle examine the current function and decide
2493 according to the facts, but on most machines the constant 0 or the
2494 constant 1 suffices. Use 0 when the machine allows code to be generated
2495 with no frame pointer, and doing so saves some time or space. Use 1
2496 when there is no possible advantage to avoiding a frame pointer.
2498 In certain cases, the compiler does not know how to produce valid code
2499 without a frame pointer. The compiler recognizes those cases and
2500 automatically gives the function a frame pointer regardless of what
2501 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED} says. You don't need to worry about
2504 In a function that does not require a frame pointer, the frame pointer
2505 register can be allocated for ordinary usage, unless you mark it as a
2506 fixed register. See @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} for more information.
2508 @findex INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET
2509 @findex get_frame_size
2510 @item INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET (@var{depth-var})
2511 A C statement to store in the variable @var{depth-var} the difference
2512 between the frame pointer and the stack pointer values immediately after
2513 the function prologue. The value would be computed from information
2514 such as the result of @code{get_frame_size ()} and the tables of
2515 registers @code{regs_ever_live} and @code{call_used_regs}.
2517 If @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} is defined, this macro will be not be used and
2518 need not be defined. Otherwise, it must be defined even if
2519 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED} is defined to always be true; in that
2520 case, you may set @var{depth-var} to anything.
2522 @findex ELIMINABLE_REGS
2523 @item ELIMINABLE_REGS
2524 If defined, this macro specifies a table of register pairs used to
2525 eliminate unneeded registers that point into the stack frame. If it is not
2526 defined, the only elimination attempted by the compiler is to replace
2527 references to the frame pointer with references to the stack pointer.
2529 The definition of this macro is a list of structure initializations, each
2530 of which specifies an original and replacement register.
2532 On some machines, the position of the argument pointer is not known until
2533 the compilation is completed. In such a case, a separate hard register
2534 must be used for the argument pointer. This register can be eliminated by
2535 replacing it with either the frame pointer or the argument pointer,
2536 depending on whether or not the frame pointer has been eliminated.
2538 In this case, you might specify:
2540 #define ELIMINABLE_REGS \
2541 @{@{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
2542 @{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
2543 @{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}@}
2546 Note that the elimination of the argument pointer with the stack pointer is
2547 specified first since that is the preferred elimination.
2549 @findex CAN_ELIMINATE
2550 @item CAN_ELIMINATE (@var{from-reg}, @var{to-reg})
2551 A C expression that returns non-zero if the compiler is allowed to try
2552 to replace register number @var{from-reg} with register number
2553 @var{to-reg}. This macro need only be defined if @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS}
2554 is defined, and will usually be the constant 1, since most of the cases
2555 preventing register elimination are things that the compiler already
2558 @findex INITIAL_ELIMINATION_OFFSET
2559 @item INITIAL_ELIMINATION_OFFSET (@var{from-reg}, @var{to-reg}, @var{offset-var})
2560 This macro is similar to @code{INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET}. It
2561 specifies the initial difference between the specified pair of
2562 registers. This macro must be defined if @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} is
2565 @findex LONGJMP_RESTORE_FROM_STACK
2566 @item LONGJMP_RESTORE_FROM_STACK
2567 Define this macro if the @code{longjmp} function restores registers from
2568 the stack frames, rather than from those saved specifically by
2569 @code{setjmp}. Certain quantities must not be kept in registers across
2570 a call to @code{setjmp} on such machines.
2573 @node Stack Arguments
2574 @subsection Passing Function Arguments on the Stack
2575 @cindex arguments on stack
2576 @cindex stack arguments
2578 The macros in this section control how arguments are passed
2579 on the stack. See the following section for other macros that
2580 control passing certain arguments in registers.
2583 @findex PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES
2584 @item PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES
2585 Define this macro if an argument declared in a prototype as an
2586 integral type smaller than @code{int} should actually be passed as an
2587 @code{int}. In addition to avoiding errors in certain cases of
2588 mismatch, it also makes for better code on certain machines.
2590 @findex PUSH_ROUNDING
2591 @item PUSH_ROUNDING (@var{npushed})
2592 A C expression that is the number of bytes actually pushed onto the
2593 stack when an instruction attempts to push @var{npushed} bytes.
2595 If the target machine does not have a push instruction, do not define
2596 this macro. That directs GNU CC to use an alternate strategy: to
2597 allocate the entire argument block and then store the arguments into
2600 On some machines, the definition
2603 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (BYTES)
2607 will suffice. But on other machines, instructions that appear
2608 to push one byte actually push two bytes in an attempt to maintain
2609 alignment. Then the definition should be
2612 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (((BYTES) + 1) & ~1)
2615 @findex ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
2616 @findex current_function_outgoing_args_size
2617 @item ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
2618 If defined, the maximum amount of space required for outgoing arguments
2619 will be computed and placed into the variable
2620 @code{current_function_outgoing_args_size}. No space will be pushed
2621 onto the stack for each call; instead, the function prologue should
2622 increase the stack frame size by this amount.
2624 Defining both @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} and @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS}
2627 @findex REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2628 @item REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
2629 Define this macro if functions should assume that stack space has been
2630 allocated for arguments even when their values are passed in
2633 The value of this macro is the size, in bytes, of the area reserved for
2634 arguments passed in registers for the function represented by @var{fndecl}.
2636 This space can be allocated by the caller, or be a part of the
2637 machine-dependent stack frame: @code{OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} says
2639 @c above is overfull. not sure what to do. --mew 5feb93 did
2640 @c something, not sure if it looks good. --mew 10feb93
2642 @findex MAYBE_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2643 @findex FINAL_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2644 @item MAYBE_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2645 @itemx FINAL_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{const_size}, @var{var_size})
2646 Define these macros in addition to the one above if functions might
2647 allocate stack space for arguments even when their values are passed
2648 in registers. These should be used when the stack space allocated
2649 for arguments in registers is not a simple constant independent of the
2650 function declaration.
2652 The value of the first macro is the size, in bytes, of the area that
2653 we should initially assume would be reserved for arguments passed in registers.
2655 The value of the second macro is the actual size, in bytes, of the area
2656 that will be reserved for arguments passed in registers. This takes two
2657 arguments: an integer representing the number of bytes of fixed sized
2658 arguments on the stack, and a tree representing the number of bytes of
2659 variable sized arguments on the stack.
2661 When these macros are defined, @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} will only be
2662 called for libcall functions, the current function, or for a function
2663 being called when it is known that such stack space must be allocated.
2664 In each case this value can be easily computed.
2666 When deciding whether a called function needs such stack space, and how
2667 much space to reserve, GNU CC uses these two macros instead of
2668 @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}.
2670 @findex OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2671 @item OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2672 Define this if it is the responsibility of the caller to allocate the area
2673 reserved for arguments passed in registers.
2675 If @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, this macro controls
2676 whether the space for these arguments counts in the value of
2677 @code{current_function_outgoing_args_size}.
2679 @findex STACK_PARMS_IN_REG_PARM_AREA
2680 @item STACK_PARMS_IN_REG_PARM_AREA
2681 Define this macro if @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is defined, but the
2682 stack parameters don't skip the area specified by it.
2683 @c i changed this, makes more sens and it should have taken care of the
2684 @c overfull.. not as specific, tho. --mew 5feb93
2686 Normally, when a parameter is not passed in registers, it is placed on the
2687 stack beyond the @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} area. Defining this macro
2688 suppresses this behavior and causes the parameter to be passed on the
2689 stack in its natural location.
2691 @findex RETURN_POPS_ARGS
2692 @item RETURN_POPS_ARGS (@var{fundecl}, @var{funtype}, @var{stack-size})
2693 A C expression that should indicate the number of bytes of its own
2694 arguments that a function pops on returning, or 0 if the
2695 function pops no arguments and the caller must therefore pop them all
2696 after the function returns.
2698 @var{fundecl} is a C variable whose value is a tree node that describes
2699 the function in question. Normally it is a node of type
2700 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} that describes the declaration of the function.
2701 From this you can obtain the DECL_MACHINE_ATTRIBUTES of the function.
2703 @var{funtype} is a C variable whose value is a tree node that
2704 describes the function in question. Normally it is a node of type
2705 @code{FUNCTION_TYPE} that describes the data type of the function.
2706 From this it is possible to obtain the data types of the value and
2707 arguments (if known).
2709 When a call to a library function is being considered, @var{fundecl}
2710 will contain an identifier node for the library function. Thus, if
2711 you need to distinguish among various library functions, you can do so
2712 by their names. Note that ``library function'' in this context means
2713 a function used to perform arithmetic, whose name is known specially
2714 in the compiler and was not mentioned in the C code being compiled.
2716 @var{stack-size} is the number of bytes of arguments passed on the
2717 stack. If a variable number of bytes is passed, it is zero, and
2718 argument popping will always be the responsibility of the calling function.
2720 On the Vax, all functions always pop their arguments, so the definition
2721 of this macro is @var{stack-size}. On the 68000, using the standard
2722 calling convention, no functions pop their arguments, so the value of
2723 the macro is always 0 in this case. But an alternative calling
2724 convention is available in which functions that take a fixed number of
2725 arguments pop them but other functions (such as @code{printf}) pop
2726 nothing (the caller pops all). When this convention is in use,
2727 @var{funtype} is examined to determine whether a function takes a fixed
2728 number of arguments.
2731 @node Register Arguments
2732 @subsection Passing Arguments in Registers
2733 @cindex arguments in registers
2734 @cindex registers arguments
2736 This section describes the macros which let you control how various
2737 types of arguments are passed in registers or how they are arranged in
2741 @findex FUNCTION_ARG
2742 @item FUNCTION_ARG (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2743 A C expression that controls whether a function argument is passed
2744 in a register, and which register.
2746 The arguments are @var{cum}, which summarizes all the previous
2747 arguments; @var{mode}, the machine mode of the argument; @var{type},
2748 the data type of the argument as a tree node or 0 if that is not known
2749 (which happens for C support library functions); and @var{named},
2750 which is 1 for an ordinary argument and 0 for nameless arguments that
2751 correspond to @samp{@dots{}} in the called function's prototype.
2753 The value of the expression is usually either a @code{reg} RTX for the
2754 hard register in which to pass the argument, or zero to pass the
2755 argument on the stack.
2757 For machines like the Vax and 68000, where normally all arguments are
2758 pushed, zero suffices as a definition.
2760 The value of the expression can also be a @code{parallel} RTX. This is
2761 used when an argument is passed in multiple locations. The mode of the
2762 of the @code{parallel} should be the mode of the entire argument. The
2763 @code{parallel} holds any number of @code{expr_list} pairs; each one
2764 describes where part of the argument is passed. In each @code{expr_list},
2765 the first operand can be either a @code{reg} RTX for the hard register
2766 in which to pass this part of the argument, or zero to pass the argument
2767 on the stack. If this operand is a @code{reg}, then the mode indicates
2768 how large this part of the argument is. The second operand of the
2769 @code{expr_list} is a @code{const_int} which gives the offset in bytes
2770 into the entire argument where this part starts.
2772 @cindex @file{stdarg.h} and register arguments
2773 The usual way to make the ANSI library @file{stdarg.h} work on a machine
2774 where some arguments are usually passed in registers, is to cause
2775 nameless arguments to be passed on the stack instead. This is done
2776 by making @code{FUNCTION_ARG} return 0 whenever @var{named} is 0.
2778 @cindex @code{MUST_PASS_IN_STACK}, and @code{FUNCTION_ARG}
2779 @cindex @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}, and @code{FUNCTION_ARG}
2780 You may use the macro @code{MUST_PASS_IN_STACK (@var{mode}, @var{type})}
2781 in the definition of this macro to determine if this argument is of a
2782 type that must be passed in the stack. If @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}
2783 is not defined and @code{FUNCTION_ARG} returns non-zero for such an
2784 argument, the compiler will abort. If @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is
2785 defined, the argument will be computed in the stack and then loaded into
2788 @findex MUST_PASS_IN_STACK
2789 @item MUST_PASS_IN_STACK (@var{mode}, @var{type})
2790 Define as a C expression that evaluates to nonzero if we do not know how
2791 to pass TYPE solely in registers. The file @file{expr.h} defines a
2792 definition that is usually appropriate, refer to @file{expr.h} for additional
2795 @findex FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG
2796 @item FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2797 Define this macro if the target machine has ``register windows'', so
2798 that the register in which a function sees an arguments is not
2799 necessarily the same as the one in which the caller passed the
2802 For such machines, @code{FUNCTION_ARG} computes the register in which
2803 the caller passes the value, and @code{FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG} should
2804 be defined in a similar fashion to tell the function being called
2805 where the arguments will arrive.
2807 If @code{FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG} is not defined, @code{FUNCTION_ARG}
2808 serves both purposes.@refill
2810 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_PARTIAL_NREGS
2811 @item FUNCTION_ARG_PARTIAL_NREGS (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2812 A C expression for the number of words, at the beginning of an
2813 argument, must be put in registers. The value must be zero for
2814 arguments that are passed entirely in registers or that are entirely
2815 pushed on the stack.
2817 On some machines, certain arguments must be passed partially in
2818 registers and partially in memory. On these machines, typically the
2819 first @var{n} words of arguments are passed in registers, and the rest
2820 on the stack. If a multi-word argument (a @code{double} or a
2821 structure) crosses that boundary, its first few words must be passed
2822 in registers and the rest must be pushed. This macro tells the
2823 compiler when this occurs, and how many of the words should go in
2826 @code{FUNCTION_ARG} for these arguments should return the first
2827 register to be used by the caller for this argument; likewise
2828 @code{FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG}, for the called function.
2830 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_PASS_BY_REFERENCE
2831 @item FUNCTION_ARG_PASS_BY_REFERENCE (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2832 A C expression that indicates when an argument must be passed by reference.
2833 If nonzero for an argument, a copy of that argument is made in memory and a
2834 pointer to the argument is passed instead of the argument itself.
2835 The pointer is passed in whatever way is appropriate for passing a pointer
2838 On machines where @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is not defined, a suitable
2839 definition of this macro might be
2841 #define FUNCTION_ARG_PASS_BY_REFERENCE\
2842 (CUM, MODE, TYPE, NAMED) \
2843 MUST_PASS_IN_STACK (MODE, TYPE)
2845 @c this is *still* too long. --mew 5feb93
2847 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_CALLEE_COPIES
2848 @item FUNCTION_ARG_CALLEE_COPIES (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2849 If defined, a C expression that indicates when it is the called function's
2850 responsibility to make a copy of arguments passed by invisible reference.
2851 Normally, the caller makes a copy and passes the address of the copy to the
2852 routine being called. When FUNCTION_ARG_CALLEE_COPIES is defined and is
2853 nonzero, the caller does not make a copy. Instead, it passes a pointer to the
2854 ``live'' value. The called function must not modify this value. If it can be
2855 determined that the value won't be modified, it need not make a copy;
2856 otherwise a copy must be made.
2858 @findex CUMULATIVE_ARGS
2859 @item CUMULATIVE_ARGS
2860 A C type for declaring a variable that is used as the first argument of
2861 @code{FUNCTION_ARG} and other related values. For some target machines,
2862 the type @code{int} suffices and can hold the number of bytes of
2865 There is no need to record in @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} anything about the
2866 arguments that have been passed on the stack. The compiler has other
2867 variables to keep track of that. For target machines on which all
2868 arguments are passed on the stack, there is no need to store anything in
2869 @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}; however, the data structure must exist and
2870 should not be empty, so use @code{int}.
2872 @findex INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS
2873 @item INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname}, @var{indirect})
2874 A C statement (sans semicolon) for initializing the variable @var{cum}
2875 for the state at the beginning of the argument list. The variable has
2876 type @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}. The value of @var{fntype} is the tree node
2877 for the data type of the function which will receive the args, or 0
2878 if the args are to a compiler support library function. The value of
2879 @var{indirect} is nonzero when processing an indirect call, for example
2880 a call through a function pointer. The value of @var{indirect} is zero
2881 for a call to an explicitly named function, a library function call, or when
2882 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used to find arguments for the function
2885 When processing a call to a compiler support library function,
2886 @var{libname} identifies which one. It is a @code{symbol_ref} rtx which
2887 contains the name of the function, as a string. @var{libname} is 0 when
2888 an ordinary C function call is being processed. Thus, each time this
2889 macro is called, either @var{libname} or @var{fntype} is nonzero, but
2890 never both of them at once.
2892 @findex INIT_CUMULATIVE_INCOMING_ARGS
2893 @item INIT_CUMULATIVE_INCOMING_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname})
2894 Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but overrides it for the purposes of
2895 finding the arguments for the function being compiled. If this macro is
2896 undefined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used instead.
2898 The value passed for @var{libname} is always 0, since library routines
2899 with special calling conventions are never compiled with GNU CC. The
2900 argument @var{libname} exists for symmetry with
2901 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}.
2902 @c could use "this macro" in place of @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}, maybe.
2903 @c --mew 5feb93 i switched the order of the sentences. --mew 10feb93
2905 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE
2906 @item FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2907 A C statement (sans semicolon) to update the summarizer variable
2908 @var{cum} to advance past an argument in the argument list. The
2909 values @var{mode}, @var{type} and @var{named} describe that argument.
2910 Once this is done, the variable @var{cum} is suitable for analyzing
2911 the @emph{following} argument with @code{FUNCTION_ARG}, etc.@refill
2913 This macro need not do anything if the argument in question was passed
2914 on the stack. The compiler knows how to track the amount of stack space
2915 used for arguments without any special help.
2917 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING
2918 @item FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (@var{mode}, @var{type})
2919 If defined, a C expression which determines whether, and in which direction,
2920 to pad out an argument with extra space. The value should be of type
2921 @code{enum direction}: either @code{upward} to pad above the argument,
2922 @code{downward} to pad below, or @code{none} to inhibit padding.
2924 The @emph{amount} of padding is always just enough to reach the next
2925 multiple of @code{FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY}; this macro does not control
2928 This macro has a default definition which is right for most systems.
2929 For little-endian machines, the default is to pad upward. For
2930 big-endian machines, the default is to pad downward for an argument of
2931 constant size shorter than an @code{int}, and upward otherwise.
2933 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY
2934 @item FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY (@var{mode}, @var{type})
2935 If defined, a C expression that gives the alignment boundary, in bits,
2936 of an argument with the specified mode and type. If it is not defined,
2937 @code{PARM_BOUNDARY} is used for all arguments.
2939 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_REGNO_P
2940 @item FUNCTION_ARG_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
2941 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
2942 register in which function arguments are sometimes passed. This does
2943 @emph{not} include implicit arguments such as the static chain and
2944 the structure-value address. On many machines, no registers can be
2945 used for this purpose since all function arguments are pushed on the
2948 @findex LOAD_ARGS_REVERSED
2949 @item LOAD_ARGS_REVERSED
2950 If defined, the order in which arguments are loaded into their
2951 respective argument registers is reversed so that the last
2952 argument is loaded first. This macro only effects arguments
2953 passed in registers.
2958 @subsection How Scalar Function Values Are Returned
2959 @cindex return values in registers
2960 @cindex values, returned by functions
2961 @cindex scalars, returned as values
2963 This section discusses the macros that control returning scalars as
2964 values---values that can fit in registers.
2967 @findex TRADITIONAL_RETURN_FLOAT
2968 @item TRADITIONAL_RETURN_FLOAT
2969 Define this macro if @samp{-traditional} should not cause functions
2970 declared to return @code{float} to convert the value to @code{double}.
2972 @findex FUNCTION_VALUE
2973 @item FUNCTION_VALUE (@var{valtype}, @var{func})
2974 A C expression to create an RTX representing the place where a
2975 function returns a value of data type @var{valtype}. @var{valtype} is
2976 a tree node representing a data type. Write @code{TYPE_MODE
2977 (@var{valtype})} to get the machine mode used to represent that type.
2978 On many machines, only the mode is relevant. (Actually, on most
2979 machines, scalar values are returned in the same place regardless of
2982 The value of the expression is usually a @code{reg} RTX for the hard
2983 register where the return value is stored. The value can also be a
2984 @code{parallel} RTX, if the return value is in multiple places. See
2985 @code{FUNCTION_ARG} for an explanation of the @code{parallel} form.
2987 If @code{PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN} is defined, you must apply the same
2988 promotion rules specified in @code{PROMOTE_MODE} if @var{valtype} is a
2991 If the precise function being called is known, @var{func} is a tree
2992 node (@code{FUNCTION_DECL}) for it; otherwise, @var{func} is a null
2993 pointer. This makes it possible to use a different value-returning
2994 convention for specific functions when all their calls are
2997 @code{FUNCTION_VALUE} is not used for return vales with aggregate data
2998 types, because these are returned in another way. See
2999 @code{STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM} and related macros, below.
3001 @findex FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE
3002 @item FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE (@var{valtype}, @var{func})
3003 Define this macro if the target machine has ``register windows''
3004 so that the register in which a function returns its value is not
3005 the same as the one in which the caller sees the value.
3007 For such machines, @code{FUNCTION_VALUE} computes the register in which
3008 the caller will see the value. @code{FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE} should be
3009 defined in a similar fashion to tell the function where to put the
3012 If @code{FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE} is not defined,
3013 @code{FUNCTION_VALUE} serves both purposes.@refill
3015 @code{FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE} is not used for return vales with
3016 aggregate data types, because these are returned in another way. See
3017 @code{STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM} and related macros, below.
3019 @findex LIBCALL_VALUE
3020 @item LIBCALL_VALUE (@var{mode})
3021 A C expression to create an RTX representing the place where a library
3022 function returns a value of mode @var{mode}. If the precise function
3023 being called is known, @var{func} is a tree node
3024 (@code{FUNCTION_DECL}) for it; otherwise, @var{func} is a null
3025 pointer. This makes it possible to use a different value-returning
3026 convention for specific functions when all their calls are
3029 Note that ``library function'' in this context means a compiler
3030 support routine, used to perform arithmetic, whose name is known
3031 specially by the compiler and was not mentioned in the C code being
3034 The definition of @code{LIBRARY_VALUE} need not be concerned aggregate
3035 data types, because none of the library functions returns such types.
3037 @findex FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P
3038 @item FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3039 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3040 register in which the values of called function may come back.
3042 A register whose use for returning values is limited to serving as the
3043 second of a pair (for a value of type @code{double}, say) need not be
3044 recognized by this macro. So for most machines, this definition
3048 #define FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P(N) ((N) == 0)
3051 If the machine has register windows, so that the caller and the called
3052 function use different registers for the return value, this macro
3053 should recognize only the caller's register numbers.
3055 @findex APPLY_RESULT_SIZE
3056 @item APPLY_RESULT_SIZE
3057 Define this macro if @samp{untyped_call} and @samp{untyped_return}
3058 need more space than is implied by @code{FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P} for
3059 saving and restoring an arbitrary return value.
3062 @node Aggregate Return
3063 @subsection How Large Values Are Returned
3064 @cindex aggregates as return values
3065 @cindex large return values
3066 @cindex returning aggregate values
3067 @cindex structure value address
3069 When a function value's mode is @code{BLKmode} (and in some other
3070 cases), the value is not returned according to @code{FUNCTION_VALUE}
3071 (@pxref{Scalar Return}). Instead, the caller passes the address of a
3072 block of memory in which the value should be stored. This address
3073 is called the @dfn{structure value address}.
3075 This section describes how to control returning structure values in
3079 @findex RETURN_IN_MEMORY
3080 @item RETURN_IN_MEMORY (@var{type})
3081 A C expression which can inhibit the returning of certain function
3082 values in registers, based on the type of value. A nonzero value says
3083 to return the function value in memory, just as large structures are
3084 always returned. Here @var{type} will be a C expression of type
3085 @code{tree}, representing the data type of the value.
3087 Note that values of mode @code{BLKmode} must be explicitly handled
3088 by this macro. Also, the option @samp{-fpcc-struct-return}
3089 takes effect regardless of this macro. On most systems, it is
3090 possible to leave the macro undefined; this causes a default
3091 definition to be used, whose value is the constant 1 for @code{BLKmode}
3092 values, and 0 otherwise.
3094 Do not use this macro to indicate that structures and unions should always
3095 be returned in memory. You should instead use @code{DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN}
3098 @findex DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN
3099 @item DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN
3100 Define this macro to be 1 if all structure and union return values must be
3101 in memory. Since this results in slower code, this should be defined
3102 only if needed for compatibility with other compilers or with an ABI.
3103 If you define this macro to be 0, then the conventions used for structure
3104 and union return values are decided by the @code{RETURN_IN_MEMORY} macro.
3106 If not defined, this defaults to the value 1.
3108 @findex STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM
3109 @item STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM
3110 If the structure value address is passed in a register, then
3111 @code{STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM} should be the number of that register.
3113 @findex STRUCT_VALUE
3115 If the structure value address is not passed in a register, define
3116 @code{STRUCT_VALUE} as an expression returning an RTX for the place
3117 where the address is passed. If it returns 0, the address is passed as
3118 an ``invisible'' first argument.
3120 @findex STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING_REGNUM
3121 @item STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING_REGNUM
3122 On some architectures the place where the structure value address
3123 is found by the called function is not the same place that the
3124 caller put it. This can be due to register windows, or it could
3125 be because the function prologue moves it to a different place.
3127 If the incoming location of the structure value address is in a
3128 register, define this macro as the register number.
3130 @findex STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING
3131 @item STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING
3132 If the incoming location is not a register, then you should define
3133 @code{STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING} as an expression for an RTX for where the
3134 called function should find the value. If it should find the value on
3135 the stack, define this to create a @code{mem} which refers to the frame
3136 pointer. A definition of 0 means that the address is passed as an
3137 ``invisible'' first argument.
3139 @findex PCC_STATIC_STRUCT_RETURN
3140 @item PCC_STATIC_STRUCT_RETURN
3141 Define this macro if the usual system convention on the target machine
3142 for returning structures and unions is for the called function to return
3143 the address of a static variable containing the value.
3145 Do not define this if the usual system convention is for the caller to
3146 pass an address to the subroutine.
3148 This macro has effect in @samp{-fpcc-struct-return} mode, but it does
3149 nothing when you use @samp{-freg-struct-return} mode.
3153 @subsection Caller-Saves Register Allocation
3155 If you enable it, GNU CC can save registers around function calls. This
3156 makes it possible to use call-clobbered registers to hold variables that
3157 must live across calls.
3160 @findex DEFAULT_CALLER_SAVES
3161 @item DEFAULT_CALLER_SAVES
3162 Define this macro if function calls on the target machine do not preserve
3163 any registers; in other words, if @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} has 1
3164 for all registers. When defined, this macro enables @samp{-fcaller-saves}
3165 by default for all optimization levels. It has no effect for optimization
3166 levels 2 and higher, where @samp{-fcaller-saves} is the default.
3168 @findex CALLER_SAVE_PROFITABLE
3169 @item CALLER_SAVE_PROFITABLE (@var{refs}, @var{calls})
3170 A C expression to determine whether it is worthwhile to consider placing
3171 a pseudo-register in a call-clobbered hard register and saving and
3172 restoring it around each function call. The expression should be 1 when
3173 this is worth doing, and 0 otherwise.
3175 If you don't define this macro, a default is used which is good on most
3176 machines: @code{4 * @var{calls} < @var{refs}}.
3179 @node Function Entry
3180 @subsection Function Entry and Exit
3181 @cindex function entry and exit
3185 This section describes the macros that output function entry
3186 (@dfn{prologue}) and exit (@dfn{epilogue}) code.
3189 @findex FUNCTION_PROLOGUE
3190 @item FUNCTION_PROLOGUE (@var{file}, @var{size})
3191 A C compound statement that outputs the assembler code for entry to a
3192 function. The prologue is responsible for setting up the stack frame,
3193 initializing the frame pointer register, saving registers that must be
3194 saved, and allocating @var{size} additional bytes of storage for the
3195 local variables. @var{size} is an integer. @var{file} is a stdio
3196 stream to which the assembler code should be output.
3198 The label for the beginning of the function need not be output by this
3199 macro. That has already been done when the macro is run.
3201 @findex regs_ever_live
3202 To determine which registers to save, the macro can refer to the array
3203 @code{regs_ever_live}: element @var{r} is nonzero if hard register
3204 @var{r} is used anywhere within the function. This implies the function
3205 prologue should save register @var{r}, provided it is not one of the
3206 call-used registers. (@code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must likewise use
3207 @code{regs_ever_live}.)
3209 On machines that have ``register windows'', the function entry code does
3210 not save on the stack the registers that are in the windows, even if
3211 they are supposed to be preserved by function calls; instead it takes
3212 appropriate steps to ``push'' the register stack, if any non-call-used
3213 registers are used in the function.
3215 @findex frame_pointer_needed
3216 On machines where functions may or may not have frame-pointers, the
3217 function entry code must vary accordingly; it must set up the frame
3218 pointer if one is wanted, and not otherwise. To determine whether a
3219 frame pointer is in wanted, the macro can refer to the variable
3220 @code{frame_pointer_needed}. The variable's value will be 1 at run
3221 time in a function that needs a frame pointer. @xref{Elimination}.
3223 The function entry code is responsible for allocating any stack space
3224 required for the function. This stack space consists of the regions
3225 listed below. In most cases, these regions are allocated in the
3226 order listed, with the last listed region closest to the top of the
3227 stack (the lowest address if @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is defined, and
3228 the highest address if it is not defined). You can use a different order
3229 for a machine if doing so is more convenient or required for
3230 compatibility reasons. Except in cases where required by standard
3231 or by a debugger, there is no reason why the stack layout used by GCC
3232 need agree with that used by other compilers for a machine.
3236 @findex current_function_pretend_args_size
3237 A region of @code{current_function_pretend_args_size} bytes of
3238 uninitialized space just underneath the first argument arriving on the
3239 stack. (This may not be at the very start of the allocated stack region
3240 if the calling sequence has pushed anything else since pushing the stack
3241 arguments. But usually, on such machines, nothing else has been pushed
3242 yet, because the function prologue itself does all the pushing.) This
3243 region is used on machines where an argument may be passed partly in
3244 registers and partly in memory, and, in some cases to support the
3245 features in @file{varargs.h} and @file{stdargs.h}.
3248 An area of memory used to save certain registers used by the function.
3249 The size of this area, which may also include space for such things as
3250 the return address and pointers to previous stack frames, is
3251 machine-specific and usually depends on which registers have been used
3252 in the function. Machines with register windows often do not require
3256 A region of at least @var{size} bytes, possibly rounded up to an allocation
3257 boundary, to contain the local variables of the function. On some machines,
3258 this region and the save area may occur in the opposite order, with the
3259 save area closer to the top of the stack.
3262 @cindex @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} and stack frames
3263 Optionally, when @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, a region of
3264 @code{current_function_outgoing_args_size} bytes to be used for outgoing
3265 argument lists of the function. @xref{Stack Arguments}.
3268 Normally, it is necessary for the macros @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
3269 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} to treat leaf functions specially. The C
3270 variable @code{leaf_function} is nonzero for such a function.
3272 @findex EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
3273 @item EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
3274 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if the return
3275 instruction or the function epilogue ignores the value of the stack
3276 pointer; in other words, if it is safe to delete an instruction to
3277 adjust the stack pointer before a return from the function.
3279 Note that this macro's value is relevant only for functions for which
3280 frame pointers are maintained. It is never safe to delete a final
3281 stack adjustment in a function that has no frame pointer, and the
3282 compiler knows this regardless of @code{EXIT_IGNORE_STACK}.
3284 @findex EPILOGUE_USES
3285 @item EPILOGUE_USES (@var{regno})
3286 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers are
3287 used by the epilogue or the @samp{return} pattern. The stack and frame
3288 pointer registers are already be assumed to be used as needed.
3290 @findex FUNCTION_EPILOGUE
3291 @item FUNCTION_EPILOGUE (@var{file}, @var{size})
3292 A C compound statement that outputs the assembler code for exit from a
3293 function. The epilogue is responsible for restoring the saved
3294 registers and stack pointer to their values when the function was
3295 called, and returning control to the caller. This macro takes the
3296 same arguments as the macro @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE}, and the
3297 registers to restore are determined from @code{regs_ever_live} and
3298 @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} in the same way.
3300 On some machines, there is a single instruction that does all the work
3301 of returning from the function. On these machines, give that
3302 instruction the name @samp{return} and do not define the macro
3303 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} at all.
3305 Do not define a pattern named @samp{return} if you want the
3306 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} to be used. If you want the target switches
3307 to control whether return instructions or epilogues are used, define a
3308 @samp{return} pattern with a validity condition that tests the target
3309 switches appropriately. If the @samp{return} pattern's validity
3310 condition is false, epilogues will be used.
3312 On machines where functions may or may not have frame-pointers, the
3313 function exit code must vary accordingly. Sometimes the code for these
3314 two cases is completely different. To determine whether a frame pointer
3315 is wanted, the macro can refer to the variable
3316 @code{frame_pointer_needed}. The variable's value will be 1 when compiling
3317 a function that needs a frame pointer.
3319 Normally, @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must
3320 treat leaf functions specially. The C variable @code{leaf_function} is
3321 nonzero for such a function. @xref{Leaf Functions}.
3323 On some machines, some functions pop their arguments on exit while
3324 others leave that for the caller to do. For example, the 68020 when
3325 given @samp{-mrtd} pops arguments in functions that take a fixed
3326 number of arguments.
3328 @findex current_function_pops_args
3329 Your definition of the macro @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} decides which
3330 functions pop their own arguments. @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} needs to
3331 know what was decided. The variable that is called
3332 @code{current_function_pops_args} is the number of bytes of its
3333 arguments that a function should pop. @xref{Scalar Return}.
3334 @c what is the "its arguments" in the above sentence referring to, pray
3335 @c tell? --mew 5feb93
3337 @findex DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE
3338 @item DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE
3339 Define this macro if the function epilogue contains delay slots to which
3340 instructions from the rest of the function can be ``moved''. The
3341 definition should be a C expression whose value is an integer
3342 representing the number of delay slots there.
3344 @findex ELIGIBLE_FOR_EPILOGUE_DELAY
3345 @item ELIGIBLE_FOR_EPILOGUE_DELAY (@var{insn}, @var{n})
3346 A C expression that returns 1 if @var{insn} can be placed in delay
3347 slot number @var{n} of the epilogue.
3349 The argument @var{n} is an integer which identifies the delay slot now
3350 being considered (since different slots may have different rules of
3351 eligibility). It is never negative and is always less than the number
3352 of epilogue delay slots (what @code{DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE} returns).
3353 If you reject a particular insn for a given delay slot, in principle, it
3354 may be reconsidered for a subsequent delay slot. Also, other insns may
3355 (at least in principle) be considered for the so far unfilled delay
3358 @findex current_function_epilogue_delay_list
3359 @findex final_scan_insn
3360 The insns accepted to fill the epilogue delay slots are put in an RTL
3361 list made with @code{insn_list} objects, stored in the variable
3362 @code{current_function_epilogue_delay_list}. The insn for the first
3363 delay slot comes first in the list. Your definition of the macro
3364 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} should fill the delay slots by outputting the
3365 insns in this list, usually by calling @code{final_scan_insn}.
3367 You need not define this macro if you did not define
3368 @code{DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE}.
3370 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
3371 @item ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK (@var{file}, @var{thunk_fndecl}, @var{delta}, @var{function})
3372 A C compound statement that outputs the assembler code for a thunk
3373 function, used to implement C++ virtual function calls with multiple
3374 inheritance. The thunk acts as a wrapper around a virtual function,
3375 adjusting the implicit object parameter before handing control off to
3378 First, emit code to add the integer @var{delta} to the location that
3379 contains the incoming first argument. Assume that this argument
3380 contains a pointer, and is the one used to pass the @code{this} pointer
3381 in C++. This is the incoming argument @emph{before} the function prologue,
3382 e.g. @samp{%o0} on a sparc. The addition must preserve the values of
3383 all other incoming arguments.
3385 After the addition, emit code to jump to @var{function}, which is a
3386 @code{FUNCTION_DECL}. This is a direct pure jump, not a call, and does
3387 not touch the return address. Hence returning from @var{FUNCTION} will
3388 return to whoever called the current @samp{thunk}.
3390 The effect must be as if @var{function} had been called directly with
3391 the adjusted first argument. This macro is responsible for emitting all
3392 of the code for a thunk function; @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
3393 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} are not invoked.
3395 The @var{thunk_fndecl} is redundant. (@var{delta} and @var{function}
3396 have already been extracted from it.) It might possibly be useful on
3397 some targets, but probably not.
3399 If you do not define this macro, the target-independent code in the C++
3400 frontend will generate a less efficient heavyweight thunk that calls
3401 @var{function} instead of jumping to it. The generic approach does
3402 not support varargs.
3406 @subsection Generating Code for Profiling
3407 @cindex profiling, code generation
3409 These macros will help you generate code for profiling.
3412 @findex FUNCTION_PROFILER
3413 @item FUNCTION_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{labelno})
3414 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3415 assembler code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount}.
3416 Before calling, the assembler code must load the address of a
3417 counter variable into a register where @code{mcount} expects to
3418 find the address. The name of this variable is @samp{LP} followed
3419 by the number @var{labelno}, so you would generate the name using
3420 @samp{LP%d} in a @code{fprintf}.
3423 The details of how the address should be passed to @code{mcount} are
3424 determined by your operating system environment, not by GNU CC. To
3425 figure them out, compile a small program for profiling using the
3426 system's installed C compiler and look at the assembler code that
3429 @findex PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
3430 @item PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
3431 Define this macro if the code for function profiling should come before
3432 the function prologue. Normally, the profiling code comes after.
3434 @findex FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER
3435 @vindex profile_block_flag
3436 @item FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{labelno})
3437 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3438 assembler code to initialize basic-block profiling for the current
3439 object module. The global compile flag @code{profile_block_flag}
3440 distinguishes two profile modes.
3443 @findex __bb_init_func
3444 @item profile_block_flag != 2
3445 Output code to call the subroutine @code{__bb_init_func} once per
3446 object module, passing it as its sole argument the address of a block
3447 allocated in the object module.
3449 The name of the block is a local symbol made with this statement:
3452 ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{buffer}, "LPBX", 0);
3455 Of course, since you are writing the definition of
3456 @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} as well as that of this macro, you
3457 can take a short cut in the definition of this macro and use the name
3458 that you know will result.
3460 The first word of this block is a flag which will be nonzero if the
3461 object module has already been initialized. So test this word first,
3462 and do not call @code{__bb_init_func} if the flag is
3463 nonzero. BLOCK_OR_LABEL contains a unique number which may be used to
3464 generate a label as a branch destination when @code{__bb_init_func}
3467 Described in assembler language, the code to be output looks like:
3477 @findex __bb_init_trace_func
3478 @item profile_block_flag == 2
3479 Output code to call the subroutine @code{__bb_init_trace_func}
3480 and pass two parameters to it. The first parameter is the same as
3481 for @code{__bb_init_func}. The second parameter is the number of the
3482 first basic block of the function as given by BLOCK_OR_LABEL. Note
3483 that @code{__bb_init_trace_func} has to be called, even if the object
3484 module has been initialized already.
3486 Described in assembler language, the code to be output looks like:
3489 parameter2 <- BLOCK_OR_LABEL
3490 call __bb_init_trace_func
3494 @findex BLOCK_PROFILER
3495 @vindex profile_block_flag
3496 @item BLOCK_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{blockno})
3497 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3498 assembler code to increment the count associated with the basic
3499 block number @var{blockno}. The global compile flag
3500 @code{profile_block_flag} distinguishes two profile modes.
3503 @item profile_block_flag != 2
3504 Output code to increment the counter directly. Basic blocks are
3505 numbered separately from zero within each compilation. The count
3506 associated with block number @var{blockno} is at index
3507 @var{blockno} in a vector of words; the name of this array is a local
3508 symbol made with this statement:
3511 ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{buffer}, "LPBX", 2);
3514 @c This paragraph is the same as one a few paragraphs up.
3515 @c That is not an error.
3516 Of course, since you are writing the definition of
3517 @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} as well as that of this macro, you
3518 can take a short cut in the definition of this macro and use the name
3519 that you know will result.
3521 Described in assembler language, the code to be output looks like:
3524 inc (LPBX2+4*BLOCKNO)
3528 @findex __bb_trace_func
3529 @item profile_block_flag == 2
3530 Output code to initialize the global structure @code{__bb} and
3531 call the function @code{__bb_trace_func}, which will increment the
3534 @code{__bb} consists of two words. In the first word, the current
3535 basic block number, as given by BLOCKNO, has to be stored. In
3536 the second word, the address of a block allocated in the object
3537 module has to be stored. The address is given by the label created
3538 with this statement:
3541 ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{buffer}, "LPBX", 0);
3544 Described in assembler language, the code to be output looks like:
3546 move BLOCKNO -> (__bb)
3547 move LPBX0 -> (__bb+4)
3548 call __bb_trace_func
3552 @findex FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER_EXIT
3553 @findex __bb_trace_ret
3554 @vindex profile_block_flag
3555 @item FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER_EXIT (@var{file})
3556 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file}
3557 assembler code to call function @code{__bb_trace_ret}. The
3558 assembler code should only be output
3559 if the global compile flag @code{profile_block_flag} == 2. This
3560 macro has to be used at every place where code for returning from
3561 a function is generated (e.g. @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE}). Although
3562 you have to write the definition of @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE}
3563 as well, you have to define this macro to tell the compiler, that
3564 the proper call to @code{__bb_trace_ret} is produced.
3566 @findex MACHINE_STATE_SAVE
3567 @findex __bb_init_trace_func
3568 @findex __bb_trace_func
3569 @findex __bb_trace_ret
3570 @item MACHINE_STATE_SAVE (@var{id})
3571 A C statement or compound statement to save all registers, which may
3572 be clobbered by a function call, including condition codes. The
3573 @code{asm} statement will be mostly likely needed to handle this
3574 task. Local labels in the assembler code can be concatenated with the
3575 string @var{id}, to obtain a unique lable name.
3577 Registers or condition codes clobbered by @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} or
3578 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must be saved in the macros
3579 @code{FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER}, @code{FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER_EXIT} and
3580 @code{BLOCK_PROFILER} prior calling @code{__bb_init_trace_func},
3581 @code{__bb_trace_ret} and @code{__bb_trace_func} respectively.
3583 @findex MACHINE_STATE_RESTORE
3584 @findex __bb_init_trace_func
3585 @findex __bb_trace_func
3586 @findex __bb_trace_ret
3587 @item MACHINE_STATE_RESTORE (@var{id})
3588 A C statement or compound statement to restore all registers, including
3589 condition codes, saved by @code{MACHINE_STATE_SAVE}.
3591 Registers or condition codes clobbered by @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} or
3592 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must be restored in the macros
3593 @code{FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER}, @code{FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER_EXIT} and
3594 @code{BLOCK_PROFILER} after calling @code{__bb_init_trace_func},
3595 @code{__bb_trace_ret} and @code{__bb_trace_func} respectively.
3597 @findex BLOCK_PROFILER_CODE
3598 @item BLOCK_PROFILER_CODE
3599 A C function or functions which are needed in the library to
3600 support block profiling.
3604 @section Implementing the Varargs Macros
3605 @cindex varargs implementation
3607 GNU CC comes with an implementation of @file{varargs.h} and
3608 @file{stdarg.h} that work without change on machines that pass arguments
3609 on the stack. Other machines require their own implementations of
3610 varargs, and the two machine independent header files must have
3611 conditionals to include it.
3613 ANSI @file{stdarg.h} differs from traditional @file{varargs.h} mainly in
3614 the calling convention for @code{va_start}. The traditional
3615 implementation takes just one argument, which is the variable in which
3616 to store the argument pointer. The ANSI implementation of
3617 @code{va_start} takes an additional second argument. The user is
3618 supposed to write the last named argument of the function here.
3620 However, @code{va_start} should not use this argument. The way to find
3621 the end of the named arguments is with the built-in functions described
3625 @findex __builtin_saveregs
3626 @item __builtin_saveregs ()
3627 Use this built-in function to save the argument registers in memory so
3628 that the varargs mechanism can access them. Both ANSI and traditional
3629 versions of @code{va_start} must use @code{__builtin_saveregs}, unless
3630 you use @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} (see below) instead.
3632 On some machines, @code{__builtin_saveregs} is open-coded under the
3633 control of the macro @code{EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS}. On other machines,
3634 it calls a routine written in assembler language, found in
3637 Code generated for the call to @code{__builtin_saveregs} appears at the
3638 beginning of the function, as opposed to where the call to
3639 @code{__builtin_saveregs} is written, regardless of what the code is.
3640 This is because the registers must be saved before the function starts
3641 to use them for its own purposes.
3642 @c i rewrote the first sentence above to fix an overfull hbox. --mew
3645 @findex __builtin_args_info
3646 @item __builtin_args_info (@var{category})
3647 Use this built-in function to find the first anonymous arguments in
3650 In general, a machine may have several categories of registers used for
3651 arguments, each for a particular category of data types. (For example,
3652 on some machines, floating-point registers are used for floating-point
3653 arguments while other arguments are passed in the general registers.)
3654 To make non-varargs functions use the proper calling convention, you
3655 have defined the @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} data type to record how many
3656 registers in each category have been used so far
3658 @code{__builtin_args_info} accesses the same data structure of type
3659 @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} after the ordinary argument layout is finished
3660 with it, with @var{category} specifying which word to access. Thus, the
3661 value indicates the first unused register in a given category.
3663 Normally, you would use @code{__builtin_args_info} in the implementation
3664 of @code{va_start}, accessing each category just once and storing the
3665 value in the @code{va_list} object. This is because @code{va_list} will
3666 have to update the values, and there is no way to alter the
3667 values accessed by @code{__builtin_args_info}.
3669 @findex __builtin_next_arg
3670 @item __builtin_next_arg (@var{lastarg})
3671 This is the equivalent of @code{__builtin_args_info}, for stack
3672 arguments. It returns the address of the first anonymous stack
3673 argument, as type @code{void *}. If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, it
3674 returns the address of the location above the first anonymous stack
3675 argument. Use it in @code{va_start} to initialize the pointer for
3676 fetching arguments from the stack. Also use it in @code{va_start} to
3677 verify that the second parameter @var{lastarg} is the last named argument
3678 of the current function.
3680 @findex __builtin_classify_type
3681 @item __builtin_classify_type (@var{object})
3682 Since each machine has its own conventions for which data types are
3683 passed in which kind of register, your implementation of @code{va_arg}
3684 has to embody these conventions. The easiest way to categorize the
3685 specified data type is to use @code{__builtin_classify_type} together
3686 with @code{sizeof} and @code{__alignof__}.
3688 @code{__builtin_classify_type} ignores the value of @var{object},
3689 considering only its data type. It returns an integer describing what
3690 kind of type that is---integer, floating, pointer, structure, and so on.
3692 The file @file{typeclass.h} defines an enumeration that you can use to
3693 interpret the values of @code{__builtin_classify_type}.
3696 These machine description macros help implement varargs:
3699 @findex EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS
3700 @item EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS (@var{args})
3701 If defined, is a C expression that produces the machine-specific code
3702 for a call to @code{__builtin_saveregs}. This code will be moved to the
3703 very beginning of the function, before any parameter access are made.
3704 The return value of this function should be an RTX that contains the
3705 value to use as the return of @code{__builtin_saveregs}.
3707 The argument @var{args} is a @code{tree_list} containing the arguments
3708 that were passed to @code{__builtin_saveregs}.
3710 If this macro is not defined, the compiler will output an ordinary
3711 call to the library function @samp{__builtin_saveregs}.
3713 @c !!! a bug in texinfo; how to make the entry on the @item line allow
3714 @c more than one line of text... help... --mew 10feb93
3715 @findex SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS
3716 @item SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS (@var{args_so_far}, @var{mode}, @var{type},
3717 @var{pretend_args_size}, @var{second_time})
3718 This macro offers an alternative to using @code{__builtin_saveregs} and
3719 defining the macro @code{EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS}. Use it to store the
3720 anonymous register arguments into the stack so that all the arguments
3721 appear to have been passed consecutively on the stack. Once this is
3722 done, you can use the standard implementation of varargs that works for
3723 machines that pass all their arguments on the stack.
3725 The argument @var{args_so_far} is the @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} data
3726 structure, containing the values that obtain after processing of the
3727 named arguments. The arguments @var{mode} and @var{type} describe the
3728 last named argument---its machine mode and its data type as a tree node.
3730 The macro implementation should do two things: first, push onto the
3731 stack all the argument registers @emph{not} used for the named
3732 arguments, and second, store the size of the data thus pushed into the
3733 @code{int}-valued variable whose name is supplied as the argument
3734 @var{pretend_args_size}. The value that you store here will serve as
3735 additional offset for setting up the stack frame.
3737 Because you must generate code to push the anonymous arguments at
3738 compile time without knowing their data types,
3739 @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} is only useful on machines that have just
3740 a single category of argument register and use it uniformly for all data
3743 If the argument @var{second_time} is nonzero, it means that the
3744 arguments of the function are being analyzed for the second time. This
3745 happens for an inline function, which is not actually compiled until the
3746 end of the source file. The macro @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} should
3747 not generate any instructions in this case.
3749 @findex STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING
3750 @item STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING
3751 Define this macro to be a nonzero value if the location where a function
3752 argument is passed depends on whether or not it is a named argument.
3754 This macro controls how the @var{named} argument to @code{FUNCTION_ARG}
3755 is set for varargs and stdarg functions. If this macro returns a
3756 nonzero value, the @var{named} argument is always true for named
3757 arguments, and false for unnamed arguments. If it returns a value of
3758 zero, but @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} is defined, then all arguments
3759 are treated as named. Otherwise, all named arguments except the last
3760 are treated as named.
3762 You need not define this macro if it always returns zero.
3766 @section Trampolines for Nested Functions
3767 @cindex trampolines for nested functions
3768 @cindex nested functions, trampolines for
3770 A @dfn{trampoline} is a small piece of code that is created at run time
3771 when the address of a nested function is taken. It normally resides on
3772 the stack, in the stack frame of the containing function. These macros
3773 tell GNU CC how to generate code to allocate and initialize a
3776 The instructions in the trampoline must do two things: load a constant
3777 address into the static chain register, and jump to the real address of
3778 the nested function. On CISC machines such as the m68k, this requires
3779 two instructions, a move immediate and a jump. Then the two addresses
3780 exist in the trampoline as word-long immediate operands. On RISC
3781 machines, it is often necessary to load each address into a register in
3782 two parts. Then pieces of each address form separate immediate
3785 The code generated to initialize the trampoline must store the variable
3786 parts---the static chain value and the function address---into the
3787 immediate operands of the instructions. On a CISC machine, this is
3788 simply a matter of copying each address to a memory reference at the
3789 proper offset from the start of the trampoline. On a RISC machine, it
3790 may be necessary to take out pieces of the address and store them
3794 @findex TRAMPOLINE_TEMPLATE
3795 @item TRAMPOLINE_TEMPLATE (@var{file})
3796 A C statement to output, on the stream @var{file}, assembler code for a
3797 block of data that contains the constant parts of a trampoline. This
3798 code should not include a label---the label is taken care of
3801 If you do not define this macro, it means no template is needed
3802 for the target. Do not define this macro on systems where the block move
3803 code to copy the trampoline into place would be larger than the code
3804 to generate it on the spot.
3806 @findex TRAMPOLINE_SECTION
3807 @item TRAMPOLINE_SECTION
3808 The name of a subroutine to switch to the section in which the
3809 trampoline template is to be placed (@pxref{Sections}). The default is
3810 a value of @samp{readonly_data_section}, which places the trampoline in
3811 the section containing read-only data.
3813 @findex TRAMPOLINE_SIZE
3814 @item TRAMPOLINE_SIZE
3815 A C expression for the size in bytes of the trampoline, as an integer.
3817 @findex TRAMPOLINE_ALIGNMENT
3818 @item TRAMPOLINE_ALIGNMENT
3819 Alignment required for trampolines, in bits.
3821 If you don't define this macro, the value of @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}
3822 is used for aligning trampolines.
3824 @findex INITIALIZE_TRAMPOLINE
3825 @item INITIALIZE_TRAMPOLINE (@var{addr}, @var{fnaddr}, @var{static_chain})
3826 A C statement to initialize the variable parts of a trampoline.
3827 @var{addr} is an RTX for the address of the trampoline; @var{fnaddr} is
3828 an RTX for the address of the nested function; @var{static_chain} is an
3829 RTX for the static chain value that should be passed to the function
3832 @findex ALLOCATE_TRAMPOLINE
3833 @item ALLOCATE_TRAMPOLINE (@var{fp})
3834 A C expression to allocate run-time space for a trampoline. The
3835 expression value should be an RTX representing a memory reference to the
3836 space for the trampoline.
3838 @cindex @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} and trampolines
3839 @cindex @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and trampolines
3840 If this macro is not defined, by default the trampoline is allocated as
3841 a stack slot. This default is right for most machines. The exceptions
3842 are machines where it is impossible to execute instructions in the stack
3843 area. On such machines, you may have to implement a separate stack,
3844 using this macro in conjunction with @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
3845 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE}.
3847 @var{fp} points to a data structure, a @code{struct function}, which
3848 describes the compilation status of the immediate containing function of
3849 the function which the trampoline is for. Normally (when
3850 @code{ALLOCATE_TRAMPOLINE} is not defined), the stack slot for the
3851 trampoline is in the stack frame of this containing function. Other
3852 allocation strategies probably must do something analogous with this
3856 Implementing trampolines is difficult on many machines because they have
3857 separate instruction and data caches. Writing into a stack location
3858 fails to clear the memory in the instruction cache, so when the program
3859 jumps to that location, it executes the old contents.
3861 Here are two possible solutions. One is to clear the relevant parts of
3862 the instruction cache whenever a trampoline is set up. The other is to
3863 make all trampolines identical, by having them jump to a standard
3864 subroutine. The former technique makes trampoline execution faster; the
3865 latter makes initialization faster.
3867 To clear the instruction cache when a trampoline is initialized, define
3868 the following macros which describe the shape of the cache.
3871 @findex INSN_CACHE_SIZE
3872 @item INSN_CACHE_SIZE
3873 The total size in bytes of the cache.
3875 @findex INSN_CACHE_LINE_WIDTH
3876 @item INSN_CACHE_LINE_WIDTH
3877 The length in bytes of each cache line. The cache is divided into cache
3878 lines which are disjoint slots, each holding a contiguous chunk of data
3879 fetched from memory. Each time data is brought into the cache, an
3880 entire line is read at once. The data loaded into a cache line is
3881 always aligned on a boundary equal to the line size.
3883 @findex INSN_CACHE_DEPTH
3884 @item INSN_CACHE_DEPTH
3885 The number of alternative cache lines that can hold any particular memory
3889 Alternatively, if the machine has system calls or instructions to clear
3890 the instruction cache directly, you can define the following macro.
3893 @findex CLEAR_INSN_CACHE
3894 @item CLEAR_INSN_CACHE (@var{BEG}, @var{END})
3895 If defined, expands to a C expression clearing the @emph{instruction
3896 cache} in the specified interval. If it is not defined, and the macro
3897 INSN_CACHE_SIZE is defined, some generic code is generated to clear the
3898 cache. The definition of this macro would typically be a series of
3899 @code{asm} statements. Both @var{BEG} and @var{END} are both pointer
3903 To use a standard subroutine, define the following macro. In addition,
3904 you must make sure that the instructions in a trampoline fill an entire
3905 cache line with identical instructions, or else ensure that the
3906 beginning of the trampoline code is always aligned at the same point in
3907 its cache line. Look in @file{m68k.h} as a guide.
3910 @findex TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
3911 @item TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
3912 Define this macro if trampolines need a special subroutine to do their
3913 work. The macro should expand to a series of @code{asm} statements
3914 which will be compiled with GNU CC. They go in a library function named
3915 @code{__transfer_from_trampoline}.
3917 If you need to avoid executing the ordinary prologue code of a compiled
3918 C function when you jump to the subroutine, you can do so by placing a
3919 special label of your own in the assembler code. Use one @code{asm}
3920 statement to generate an assembler label, and another to make the label
3921 global. Then trampolines can use that label to jump directly to your
3922 special assembler code.
3926 @section Implicit Calls to Library Routines
3927 @cindex library subroutine names
3928 @cindex @file{libgcc.a}
3930 @c prevent bad page break with this line
3931 Here is an explanation of implicit calls to library routines.
3934 @findex MULSI3_LIBCALL
3935 @item MULSI3_LIBCALL
3936 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
3937 multiplication of one signed full-word by another. If you do not
3938 define this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__mulsi3},
3939 a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3941 @findex DIVSI3_LIBCALL
3942 @item DIVSI3_LIBCALL
3943 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
3944 division of one signed full-word by another. If you do not define
3945 this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__divsi3}, a
3946 function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3948 @findex UDIVSI3_LIBCALL
3949 @item UDIVSI3_LIBCALL
3950 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
3951 division of one unsigned full-word by another. If you do not define
3952 this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__udivsi3}, a
3953 function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3955 @findex MODSI3_LIBCALL
3956 @item MODSI3_LIBCALL
3957 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
3958 remainder in division of one signed full-word by another. If you do
3959 not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
3960 @code{__modsi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3962 @findex UMODSI3_LIBCALL
3963 @item UMODSI3_LIBCALL
3964 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
3965 remainder in division of one unsigned full-word by another. If you do
3966 not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
3967 @code{__umodsi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3969 @findex MULDI3_LIBCALL
3970 @item MULDI3_LIBCALL
3971 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
3972 multiplication of one signed double-word by another. If you do not
3973 define this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__muldi3},
3974 a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3976 @findex DIVDI3_LIBCALL
3977 @item DIVDI3_LIBCALL
3978 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
3979 division of one signed double-word by another. If you do not define
3980 this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__divdi3}, a
3981 function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3983 @findex UDIVDI3_LIBCALL
3984 @item UDIVDI3_LIBCALL
3985 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
3986 division of one unsigned full-word by another. If you do not define
3987 this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__udivdi3}, a
3988 function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3990 @findex MODDI3_LIBCALL
3991 @item MODDI3_LIBCALL
3992 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
3993 remainder in division of one signed double-word by another. If you do
3994 not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
3995 @code{__moddi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3997 @findex UMODDI3_LIBCALL
3998 @item UMODDI3_LIBCALL
3999 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
4000 remainder in division of one unsigned full-word by another. If you do
4001 not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
4002 @code{__umoddi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4004 @findex INIT_TARGET_OPTABS
4005 @item INIT_TARGET_OPTABS
4006 Define this macro as a C statement that declares additional library
4007 routines renames existing ones. @code{init_optabs} calls this macro after
4008 initializing all the normal library routines.
4011 @cindex @code{EDOM}, implicit usage
4013 The value of @code{EDOM} on the target machine, as a C integer constant
4014 expression. If you don't define this macro, GNU CC does not attempt to
4015 deposit the value of @code{EDOM} into @code{errno} directly. Look in
4016 @file{/usr/include/errno.h} to find the value of @code{EDOM} on your
4019 If you do not define @code{TARGET_EDOM}, then compiled code reports
4020 domain errors by calling the library function and letting it report the
4021 error. If mathematical functions on your system use @code{matherr} when
4022 there is an error, then you should leave @code{TARGET_EDOM} undefined so
4023 that @code{matherr} is used normally.
4025 @findex GEN_ERRNO_RTX
4026 @cindex @code{errno}, implicit usage
4028 Define this macro as a C expression to create an rtl expression that
4029 refers to the global ``variable'' @code{errno}. (On certain systems,
4030 @code{errno} may not actually be a variable.) If you don't define this
4031 macro, a reasonable default is used.
4033 @findex TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
4034 @cindex @code{bcopy}, implicit usage
4035 @cindex @code{memcpy}, implicit usage
4036 @cindex @code{bzero}, implicit usage
4037 @cindex @code{memset}, implicit usage
4038 @item TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
4039 Define this macro if GNU CC should generate calls to the System V
4040 (and ANSI C) library functions @code{memcpy} and @code{memset}
4041 rather than the BSD functions @code{bcopy} and @code{bzero}.
4043 @findex LIBGCC_NEEDS_DOUBLE
4044 @item LIBGCC_NEEDS_DOUBLE
4045 Define this macro if only @code{float} arguments cannot be passed to
4046 library routines (so they must be converted to @code{double}). This
4047 macro affects both how library calls are generated and how the library
4048 routines in @file{libgcc1.c} accept their arguments. It is useful on
4049 machines where floating and fixed point arguments are passed
4050 differently, such as the i860.
4052 @findex FLOAT_ARG_TYPE
4053 @item FLOAT_ARG_TYPE
4054 Define this macro to override the type used by the library routines to
4055 pick up arguments of type @code{float}. (By default, they use a union
4056 of @code{float} and @code{int}.)
4058 The obvious choice would be @code{float}---but that won't work with
4059 traditional C compilers that expect all arguments declared as @code{float}
4060 to arrive as @code{double}. To avoid this conversion, the library routines
4061 ask for the value as some other type and then treat it as a @code{float}.
4063 On some systems, no other type will work for this. For these systems,
4064 you must use @code{LIBGCC_NEEDS_DOUBLE} instead, to force conversion of
4065 the values @code{double} before they are passed.
4068 @item FLOATIFY (@var{passed-value})
4069 Define this macro to override the way library routines redesignate a
4070 @code{float} argument as a @code{float} instead of the type it was
4071 passed as. The default is an expression which takes the @code{float}
4074 @findex FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE
4075 @item FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE
4076 Define this macro to override the type used by the library routines to
4077 return values that ought to have type @code{float}. (By default, they
4080 The obvious choice would be @code{float}---but that won't work with
4081 traditional C compilers gratuitously convert values declared as
4082 @code{float} into @code{double}.
4085 @item INTIFY (@var{float-value})
4086 Define this macro to override the way the value of a
4087 @code{float}-returning library routine should be packaged in order to
4088 return it. These functions are actually declared to return type
4089 @code{FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE} (normally @code{int}).
4091 These values can't be returned as type @code{float} because traditional
4092 C compilers would gratuitously convert the value to a @code{double}.
4094 A local variable named @code{intify} is always available when the macro
4095 @code{INTIFY} is used. It is a union of a @code{float} field named
4096 @code{f} and a field named @code{i} whose type is
4097 @code{FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE} or @code{int}.
4099 If you don't define this macro, the default definition works by copying
4100 the value through that union.
4102 @findex nongcc_SI_type
4103 @item nongcc_SI_type
4104 Define this macro as the name of the data type corresponding to
4105 @code{SImode} in the system's own C compiler.
4107 You need not define this macro if that type is @code{long int}, as it usually
4110 @findex nongcc_word_type
4111 @item nongcc_word_type
4112 Define this macro as the name of the data type corresponding to the
4113 word_mode in the system's own C compiler.
4115 You need not define this macro if that type is @code{long int}, as it usually
4118 @findex perform_@dots{}
4119 @item perform_@dots{}
4120 Define these macros to supply explicit C statements to carry out various
4121 arithmetic operations on types @code{float} and @code{double} in the
4122 library routines in @file{libgcc1.c}. See that file for a full list
4123 of these macros and their arguments.
4125 On most machines, you don't need to define any of these macros, because
4126 the C compiler that comes with the system takes care of doing them.
4128 @findex NEXT_OBJC_RUNTIME
4129 @item NEXT_OBJC_RUNTIME
4130 Define this macro to generate code for Objective C message sending using
4131 the calling convention of the NeXT system. This calling convention
4132 involves passing the object, the selector and the method arguments all
4133 at once to the method-lookup library function.
4135 The default calling convention passes just the object and the selector
4136 to the lookup function, which returns a pointer to the method.
4139 @node Addressing Modes
4140 @section Addressing Modes
4141 @cindex addressing modes
4143 @c prevent bad page break with this line
4144 This is about addressing modes.
4147 @findex HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
4148 @item HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
4149 Define this macro if the machine supports post-increment addressing.
4151 @findex HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
4152 @findex HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
4153 @findex HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
4154 @item HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
4155 @itemx HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
4156 @itemx HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
4157 Similar for other kinds of addressing.
4159 @findex CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P
4160 @item CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (@var{x})
4161 A C expression that is 1 if the RTX @var{x} is a constant which
4162 is a valid address. On most machines, this can be defined as
4163 @code{CONSTANT_P (@var{x})}, but a few machines are more restrictive
4164 in which constant addresses are supported.
4167 @code{CONSTANT_P} accepts integer-values expressions whose values are
4168 not explicitly known, such as @code{symbol_ref}, @code{label_ref}, and
4169 @code{high} expressions and @code{const} arithmetic expressions, in
4170 addition to @code{const_int} and @code{const_double} expressions.
4172 @findex MAX_REGS_PER_ADDRESS
4173 @item MAX_REGS_PER_ADDRESS
4174 A number, the maximum number of registers that can appear in a valid
4175 memory address. Note that it is up to you to specify a value equal to
4176 the maximum number that @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS} would ever
4179 @findex GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS
4180 @item GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS (@var{mode}, @var{x}, @var{label})
4181 A C compound statement with a conditional @code{goto @var{label};}
4182 executed if @var{x} (an RTX) is a legitimate memory address on the
4183 target machine for a memory operand of mode @var{mode}.
4185 It usually pays to define several simpler macros to serve as
4186 subroutines for this one. Otherwise it may be too complicated to
4189 This macro must exist in two variants: a strict variant and a
4190 non-strict one. The strict variant is used in the reload pass. It
4191 must be defined so that any pseudo-register that has not been
4192 allocated a hard register is considered a memory reference. In
4193 contexts where some kind of register is required, a pseudo-register
4194 with no hard register must be rejected.
4196 The non-strict variant is used in other passes. It must be defined to
4197 accept all pseudo-registers in every context where some kind of
4198 register is required.
4200 @findex REG_OK_STRICT
4201 Compiler source files that want to use the strict variant of this
4202 macro define the macro @code{REG_OK_STRICT}. You should use an
4203 @code{#ifdef REG_OK_STRICT} conditional to define the strict variant
4204 in that case and the non-strict variant otherwise.
4206 Subroutines to check for acceptable registers for various purposes (one
4207 for base registers, one for index registers, and so on) are typically
4208 among the subroutines used to define @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS}.
4209 Then only these subroutine macros need have two variants; the higher
4210 levels of macros may be the same whether strict or not.@refill
4212 Normally, constant addresses which are the sum of a @code{symbol_ref}
4213 and an integer are stored inside a @code{const} RTX to mark them as
4214 constant. Therefore, there is no need to recognize such sums
4215 specifically as legitimate addresses. Normally you would simply
4216 recognize any @code{const} as legitimate.
4218 Usually @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS} is not prepared to handle constant
4219 sums that are not marked with @code{const}. It assumes that a naked
4220 @code{plus} indicates indexing. If so, then you @emph{must} reject such
4221 naked constant sums as illegitimate addresses, so that none of them will
4222 be given to @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}.
4224 @cindex @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} and address validation
4225 On some machines, whether a symbolic address is legitimate depends on
4226 the section that the address refers to. On these machines, define the
4227 macro @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} to store the information into the
4228 @code{symbol_ref}, and then check for it here. When you see a
4229 @code{const}, you will have to look inside it to find the
4230 @code{symbol_ref} in order to determine the section. @xref{Assembler
4233 @findex saveable_obstack
4234 The best way to modify the name string is by adding text to the
4235 beginning, with suitable punctuation to prevent any ambiguity. Allocate
4236 the new name in @code{saveable_obstack}. You will have to modify
4237 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} to remove and decode the added text and
4238 output the name accordingly, and define @code{STRIP_NAME_ENCODING} to
4239 access the original name string.
4241 You can check the information stored here into the @code{symbol_ref} in
4242 the definitions of the macros @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS} and
4243 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}.
4245 @findex REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P
4246 @item REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{x})
4247 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} (assumed to be a @code{reg}
4248 RTX) is valid for use as a base register. For hard registers, it
4249 should always accept those which the hardware permits and reject the
4250 others. Whether the macro accepts or rejects pseudo registers must be
4251 controlled by @code{REG_OK_STRICT} as described above. This usually
4252 requires two variant definitions, of which @code{REG_OK_STRICT}
4253 controls the one actually used.
4255 @findex REG_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P
4256 @item REG_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{x}, @var{mode})
4257 A C expression that is just like @code{REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except that
4258 that expression may examine the mode of the memory reference in
4259 @var{mode}. You should define this macro if the mode of the memory
4260 reference affects whether a register may be used as a base register. If
4261 you define this macro, the compiler will use it instead of
4262 @code{REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P}.
4264 @findex REG_OK_FOR_INDEX_P
4265 @item REG_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (@var{x})
4266 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} (assumed to be a @code{reg}
4267 RTX) is valid for use as an index register.
4269 The difference between an index register and a base register is that
4270 the index register may be scaled. If an address involves the sum of
4271 two registers, neither one of them scaled, then either one may be
4272 labeled the ``base'' and the other the ``index''; but whichever
4273 labeling is used must fit the machine's constraints of which registers
4274 may serve in each capacity. The compiler will try both labelings,
4275 looking for one that is valid, and will reload one or both registers
4276 only if neither labeling works.
4278 @findex LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
4279 @item LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS (@var{x}, @var{oldx}, @var{mode}, @var{win})
4280 A C compound statement that attempts to replace @var{x} with a valid
4281 memory address for an operand of mode @var{mode}. @var{win} will be a
4282 C statement label elsewhere in the code; the macro definition may use
4285 GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS (@var{mode}, @var{x}, @var{win});
4289 to avoid further processing if the address has become legitimate.
4291 @findex break_out_memory_refs
4292 @var{x} will always be the result of a call to @code{break_out_memory_refs},
4293 and @var{oldx} will be the operand that was given to that function to produce
4296 The code generated by this macro should not alter the substructure of
4297 @var{x}. If it transforms @var{x} into a more legitimate form, it
4298 should assign @var{x} (which will always be a C variable) a new value.
4300 It is not necessary for this macro to come up with a legitimate
4301 address. The compiler has standard ways of doing so in all cases. In
4302 fact, it is safe for this macro to do nothing. But often a
4303 machine-dependent strategy can generate better code.
4305 @findex LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS
4306 @item LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS (@var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{opnum}, @var{type}, @var{ind_levels}, @var{win})
4307 A C compound statement that attempts to replace @var{x}, which is an address
4308 that needs reloading, with a valid memory address for an operand of mode
4309 @var{mode}. @var{win} will be a C statement label elsewhere in the code.
4310 It is not necessary to define this macro, but it might be useful for
4311 performance reasons.
4313 For example, on the i386, it is sometimes possible to use a single
4314 reload register instead of two by reloading a sum of two pseudo
4315 registers into a register. On the other hand, for number of RISC
4316 processors offsets are limited so that often an intermediate address
4317 needs to be generated in order to address a stack slot. By defining
4318 LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS appropriately, the intermediate addresses
4319 generated for adjacent some stack slots can be made identical, and thus
4322 @emph{Note}: This macro should be used with caution. It is necessary
4323 to know something of how reload works in order to effectively use this,
4324 and it is quite easy to produce macros that build in too much knowledge
4325 of reload internals.
4327 @emph{Note}: This macro must be able to reload an address created by a
4328 previous invocation of this macro. If it fails to handle such addresses
4329 then the compiler may generate incorrect code or abort.
4332 The macro definition should use @code{push_reload} to indicate parts that
4333 need reloading; @var{opnum}, @var{type} and @var{ind_levels} are usually
4334 suitable to be passed unaltered to @code{push_reload}.
4336 The code generated by this macro must not alter the substructure of
4337 @var{x}. If it transforms @var{x} into a more legitimate form, it
4338 should assign @var{x} (which will always be a C variable) a new value.
4339 This also applies to parts that you change indirectly by calling
4342 @findex strict_memory_address_p
4343 The macro definition may use @code{strict_memory_address_p} to test if
4344 the address has become legitimate.
4347 If you want to change only a part of @var{x}, one standard way of doing
4348 this is to use @code{copy_rtx}. Note, however, that is unshares only a
4349 single level of rtl. Thus, if the part to be changed is not at the
4350 top level, you'll need to replace first the top leve
4351 It is not necessary for this macro to come up with a legitimate
4352 address; but often a machine-dependent strategy can generate better code.
4354 @findex GO_IF_MODE_DEPENDENT_ADDRESS
4355 @item GO_IF_MODE_DEPENDENT_ADDRESS (@var{addr}, @var{label})
4356 A C statement or compound statement with a conditional @code{goto
4357 @var{label};} executed if memory address @var{x} (an RTX) can have
4358 different meanings depending on the machine mode of the memory
4359 reference it is used for or if the address is valid for some modes
4362 Autoincrement and autodecrement addresses typically have mode-dependent
4363 effects because the amount of the increment or decrement is the size
4364 of the operand being addressed. Some machines have other mode-dependent
4365 addresses. Many RISC machines have no mode-dependent addresses.
4367 You may assume that @var{addr} is a valid address for the machine.
4369 @findex LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P
4370 @item LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (@var{x})
4371 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} is a legitimate constant for
4372 an immediate operand on the target machine. You can assume that
4373 @var{x} satisfies @code{CONSTANT_P}, so you need not check this. In fact,
4374 @samp{1} is a suitable definition for this macro on machines where
4375 anything @code{CONSTANT_P} is valid.@refill
4377 @findex DONT_RECORD_EQUIVALENCE
4378 @item DONT_RECORD_EQUIVALENCE (@var{note})
4379 A C expression that is nonzero if the @code{REG_EQUAL} note @var{x} should not
4380 be promoted to a @code{REG_EQUIV} note.
4382 Define this macro if @var{note} refers to a constant that must be accepted
4383 by @code{LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P}, but must not appear as an immediate operand.
4385 Most machine descriptions do not need to define this macro.
4388 @node Condition Code
4389 @section Condition Code Status
4390 @cindex condition code status
4392 @c prevent bad page break with this line
4393 This describes the condition code status.
4396 The file @file{conditions.h} defines a variable @code{cc_status} to
4397 describe how the condition code was computed (in case the interpretation of
4398 the condition code depends on the instruction that it was set by). This
4399 variable contains the RTL expressions on which the condition code is
4400 currently based, and several standard flags.
4402 Sometimes additional machine-specific flags must be defined in the machine
4403 description header file. It can also add additional machine-specific
4404 information by defining @code{CC_STATUS_MDEP}.
4407 @findex CC_STATUS_MDEP
4408 @item CC_STATUS_MDEP
4409 C code for a data type which is used for declaring the @code{mdep}
4410 component of @code{cc_status}. It defaults to @code{int}.
4412 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4414 @findex CC_STATUS_MDEP_INIT
4415 @item CC_STATUS_MDEP_INIT
4416 A C expression to initialize the @code{mdep} field to ``empty''.
4417 The default definition does nothing, since most machines don't use
4418 the field anyway. If you want to use the field, you should probably
4419 define this macro to initialize it.
4421 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4423 @findex NOTICE_UPDATE_CC
4424 @item NOTICE_UPDATE_CC (@var{exp}, @var{insn})
4425 A C compound statement to set the components of @code{cc_status}
4426 appropriately for an insn @var{insn} whose body is @var{exp}. It is
4427 this macro's responsibility to recognize insns that set the condition
4428 code as a byproduct of other activity as well as those that explicitly
4431 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4433 If there are insns that do not set the condition code but do alter
4434 other machine registers, this macro must check to see whether they
4435 invalidate the expressions that the condition code is recorded as
4436 reflecting. For example, on the 68000, insns that store in address
4437 registers do not set the condition code, which means that usually
4438 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} can leave @code{cc_status} unaltered for such
4439 insns. But suppose that the previous insn set the condition code
4440 based on location @samp{a4@@(102)} and the current insn stores a new
4441 value in @samp{a4}. Although the condition code is not changed by
4442 this, it will no longer be true that it reflects the contents of
4443 @samp{a4@@(102)}. Therefore, @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must alter
4444 @code{cc_status} in this case to say that nothing is known about the
4445 condition code value.
4447 The definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must be prepared to deal
4448 with the results of peephole optimization: insns whose patterns are
4449 @code{parallel} RTXs containing various @code{reg}, @code{mem} or
4450 constants which are just the operands. The RTL structure of these
4451 insns is not sufficient to indicate what the insns actually do. What
4452 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} should do when it sees one is just to run
4453 @code{CC_STATUS_INIT}.
4455 A possible definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} is to call a function
4456 that looks at an attribute (@pxref{Insn Attributes}) named, for example,
4457 @samp{cc}. This avoids having detailed information about patterns in
4458 two places, the @file{md} file and in @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC}.
4460 @findex EXTRA_CC_MODES
4461 @item EXTRA_CC_MODES
4462 A list of names to be used for additional modes for condition code
4463 values in registers (@pxref{Jump Patterns}). These names are added
4464 to @code{enum machine_mode} and all have class @code{MODE_CC}. By
4465 convention, they should start with @samp{CC} and end with @samp{mode}.
4467 You should only define this macro if your machine does not use @code{cc0}
4468 and only if additional modes are required.
4470 @findex EXTRA_CC_NAMES
4471 @item EXTRA_CC_NAMES
4472 A list of C strings giving the names for the modes listed in
4473 @code{EXTRA_CC_MODES}. For example, the Sparc defines this macro and
4474 @code{EXTRA_CC_MODES} as
4477 #define EXTRA_CC_MODES CC_NOOVmode, CCFPmode, CCFPEmode
4478 #define EXTRA_CC_NAMES "CC_NOOV", "CCFP", "CCFPE"
4481 This macro is not required if @code{EXTRA_CC_MODES} is not defined.
4483 @findex SELECT_CC_MODE
4484 @item SELECT_CC_MODE (@var{op}, @var{x}, @var{y})
4485 Returns a mode from class @code{MODE_CC} to be used when comparison
4486 operation code @var{op} is applied to rtx @var{x} and @var{y}. For
4487 example, on the Sparc, @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} is defined as (see
4488 @pxref{Jump Patterns} for a description of the reason for this
4492 #define SELECT_CC_MODE(OP,X,Y) \
4493 (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (X)) == MODE_FLOAT \
4494 ? ((OP == EQ || OP == NE) ? CCFPmode : CCFPEmode) \
4495 : ((GET_CODE (X) == PLUS || GET_CODE (X) == MINUS \
4496 || GET_CODE (X) == NEG) \
4497 ? CC_NOOVmode : CCmode))
4500 You need not define this macro if @code{EXTRA_CC_MODES} is not defined.
4502 @findex CANONICALIZE_COMPARISON
4503 @item CANONICALIZE_COMPARISON (@var{code}, @var{op0}, @var{op1})
4504 One some machines not all possible comparisons are defined, but you can
4505 convert an invalid comparison into a valid one. For example, the Alpha
4506 does not have a @code{GT} comparison, but you can use an @code{LT}
4507 comparison instead and swap the order of the operands.
4509 On such machines, define this macro to be a C statement to do any
4510 required conversions. @var{code} is the initial comparison code
4511 and @var{op0} and @var{op1} are the left and right operands of the
4512 comparison, respectively. You should modify @var{code}, @var{op0}, and
4513 @var{op1} as required.
4515 GNU CC will not assume that the comparison resulting from this macro is
4516 valid but will see if the resulting insn matches a pattern in the
4519 You need not define this macro if it would never change the comparison
4522 @findex REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE
4523 @item REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})
4524 A C expression whose value is one if it is always safe to reverse a
4525 comparison whose mode is @var{mode}. If @code{SELECT_CC_MODE}
4526 can ever return @var{mode} for a floating-point inequality comparison,
4527 then @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} must be zero.
4529 You need not define this macro if it would always returns zero or if the
4530 floating-point format is anything other than @code{IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT}.
4531 For example, here is the definition used on the Sparc, where floating-point
4532 inequality comparisons are always given @code{CCFPEmode}:
4535 #define REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE(MODE) ((MODE) != CCFPEmode)
4541 @section Describing Relative Costs of Operations
4542 @cindex costs of instructions
4543 @cindex relative costs
4544 @cindex speed of instructions
4546 These macros let you describe the relative speed of various operations
4547 on the target machine.
4551 @item CONST_COSTS (@var{x}, @var{code}, @var{outer_code})
4552 A part of a C @code{switch} statement that describes the relative costs
4553 of constant RTL expressions. It must contain @code{case} labels for
4554 expression codes @code{const_int}, @code{const}, @code{symbol_ref},
4555 @code{label_ref} and @code{const_double}. Each case must ultimately
4556 reach a @code{return} statement to return the relative cost of the use
4557 of that kind of constant value in an expression. The cost may depend on
4558 the precise value of the constant, which is available for examination in
4559 @var{x}, and the rtx code of the expression in which it is contained,
4560 found in @var{outer_code}.
4562 @var{code} is the expression code---redundant, since it can be
4563 obtained with @code{GET_CODE (@var{x})}.
4566 @findex COSTS_N_INSNS
4567 @item RTX_COSTS (@var{x}, @var{code}, @var{outer_code})
4568 Like @code{CONST_COSTS} but applies to nonconstant RTL expressions.
4569 This can be used, for example, to indicate how costly a multiply
4570 instruction is. In writing this macro, you can use the construct
4571 @code{COSTS_N_INSNS (@var{n})} to specify a cost equal to @var{n} fast
4572 instructions. @var{outer_code} is the code of the expression in which
4573 @var{x} is contained.
4575 This macro is optional; do not define it if the default cost assumptions
4576 are adequate for the target machine.
4578 @findex DEFAULT_RTX_COSTS
4579 @item DEFAULT_RTX_COSTS (@var{x}, @var{code}, @var{outer_code})
4580 This macro, if defined, is called for any case not handled by the
4581 @code{RTX_COSTS} or @code{CONST_COSTS} macros. This eliminates the need
4582 to put case labels into the macro, but the code, or any functions it
4583 calls, must assume that the RTL in @var{x} could be of any type that has
4584 not already been handled. The arguments are the same as for
4585 @code{RTX_COSTS}, and the macro should execute a return statement giving
4586 the cost of any RTL expressions that it can handle. The default cost
4587 calculation is used for any RTL for which this macro does not return a
4590 This macro is optional; do not define it if the default cost assumptions
4591 are adequate for the target machine.
4593 @findex ADDRESS_COST
4594 @item ADDRESS_COST (@var{address})
4595 An expression giving the cost of an addressing mode that contains
4596 @var{address}. If not defined, the cost is computed from
4597 the @var{address} expression and the @code{CONST_COSTS} values.
4599 For most CISC machines, the default cost is a good approximation of the
4600 true cost of the addressing mode. However, on RISC machines, all
4601 instructions normally have the same length and execution time. Hence
4602 all addresses will have equal costs.
4604 In cases where more than one form of an address is known, the form with
4605 the lowest cost will be used. If multiple forms have the same, lowest,
4606 cost, the one that is the most complex will be used.
4608 For example, suppose an address that is equal to the sum of a register
4609 and a constant is used twice in the same basic block. When this macro
4610 is not defined, the address will be computed in a register and memory
4611 references will be indirect through that register. On machines where
4612 the cost of the addressing mode containing the sum is no higher than
4613 that of a simple indirect reference, this will produce an additional
4614 instruction and possibly require an additional register. Proper
4615 specification of this macro eliminates this overhead for such machines.
4617 Similar use of this macro is made in strength reduction of loops.
4619 @var{address} need not be valid as an address. In such a case, the cost
4620 is not relevant and can be any value; invalid addresses need not be
4621 assigned a different cost.
4623 On machines where an address involving more than one register is as
4624 cheap as an address computation involving only one register, defining
4625 @code{ADDRESS_COST} to reflect this can cause two registers to be live
4626 over a region of code where only one would have been if
4627 @code{ADDRESS_COST} were not defined in that manner. This effect should
4628 be considered in the definition of this macro. Equivalent costs should
4629 probably only be given to addresses with different numbers of registers
4630 on machines with lots of registers.
4632 This macro will normally either not be defined or be defined as a
4635 @findex REGISTER_MOVE_COST
4636 @item REGISTER_MOVE_COST (@var{from}, @var{to})
4637 A C expression for the cost of moving data from a register in class
4638 @var{from} to one in class @var{to}. The classes are expressed using
4639 the enumeration values such as @code{GENERAL_REGS}. A value of 2 is the
4640 default; other values are interpreted relative to that.
4642 It is not required that the cost always equal 2 when @var{from} is the
4643 same as @var{to}; on some machines it is expensive to move between
4644 registers if they are not general registers.
4646 If reload sees an insn consisting of a single @code{set} between two
4647 hard registers, and if @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST} applied to their
4648 classes returns a value of 2, reload does not check to ensure that the
4649 constraints of the insn are met. Setting a cost of other than 2 will
4650 allow reload to verify that the constraints are met. You should do this
4651 if the @samp{mov@var{m}} pattern's constraints do not allow such copying.
4653 @findex MEMORY_MOVE_COST
4654 @item MEMORY_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{class}, @var{in})
4655 A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} between a
4656 register of class @var{class} and memory; @var{in} is zero if the value
4657 is to be written to memory, non-zero if it is to be read in. This cost
4658 is relative to those in @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST}. If moving between
4659 registers and memory is more expensive than between two registers, you
4660 should define this macro to express the relative cost.
4662 If you do not define this macro, GNU CC uses a default cost of 4 plus
4663 the cost of copying via a secondary reload register, if one is
4664 needed. If your machine requires a secondary reload register to copy
4665 between memory and a register of @var{class} but the reload mechanism is
4666 more complex than copying via an intermediate, define this macro to
4667 reflect the actual cost of the move.
4669 GNU CC defines the function @code{memory_move_secondary_cost} if
4670 secondary reloads are needed. It computes the costs due to copying via
4671 a secondary register. If your machine copies from memory using a
4672 secondary register in the conventional way but the default base value of
4673 4 is not correct for your machine, define this macro to add some other
4674 value to the result of that function. The arguments to that function
4675 are the same as to this macro.
4679 A C expression for the cost of a branch instruction. A value of 1 is
4680 the default; other values are interpreted relative to that.
4683 Here are additional macros which do not specify precise relative costs,
4684 but only that certain actions are more expensive than GNU CC would
4688 @findex SLOW_BYTE_ACCESS
4689 @item SLOW_BYTE_ACCESS
4690 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if accessing less
4691 than a word of memory (i.e. a @code{char} or a @code{short}) is no
4692 faster than accessing a word of memory, i.e., if such access
4693 require more than one instruction or if there is no difference in cost
4694 between byte and (aligned) word loads.
4696 When this macro is not defined, the compiler will access a field by
4697 finding the smallest containing object; when it is defined, a fullword
4698 load will be used if alignment permits. Unless bytes accesses are
4699 faster than word accesses, using word accesses is preferable since it
4700 may eliminate subsequent memory access if subsequent accesses occur to
4701 other fields in the same word of the structure, but to different bytes.
4703 @findex SLOW_ZERO_EXTEND
4704 @item SLOW_ZERO_EXTEND
4705 Define this macro if zero-extension (of a @code{char} or @code{short}
4706 to an @code{int}) can be done faster if the destination is a register
4707 that is known to be zero.
4709 If you define this macro, you must have instruction patterns that
4710 recognize RTL structures like this:
4713 (set (strict_low_part (subreg:QI (reg:SI @dots{}) 0)) @dots{})
4717 and likewise for @code{HImode}.
4719 @findex SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS
4720 @item SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS
4721 Define this macro to be the value 1 if unaligned accesses have a cost
4722 many times greater than aligned accesses, for example if they are
4723 emulated in a trap handler.
4725 When this macro is non-zero, the compiler will act as if
4726 @code{STRICT_ALIGNMENT} were non-zero when generating code for block
4727 moves. This can cause significantly more instructions to be produced.
4728 Therefore, do not set this macro non-zero if unaligned accesses only add a
4729 cycle or two to the time for a memory access.
4731 If the value of this macro is always zero, it need not be defined.
4733 @findex DONT_REDUCE_ADDR
4734 @item DONT_REDUCE_ADDR
4735 Define this macro to inhibit strength reduction of memory addresses.
4736 (On some machines, such strength reduction seems to do harm rather
4741 The threshold of number of scalar memory-to-memory move insns, @emph{below}
4742 which a sequence of insns should be generated instead of a
4743 string move insn or a library call. Increasing the value will always
4744 make code faster, but eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4746 Note that on machines with no memory-to-memory move insns, this macro denotes
4747 the corresponding number of memory-to-memory @emph{sequences}.
4749 If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
4751 @findex NO_FUNCTION_CSE
4752 @item NO_FUNCTION_CSE
4753 Define this macro if it is as good or better to call a constant
4754 function address than to call an address kept in a register.
4756 @findex NO_RECURSIVE_FUNCTION_CSE
4757 @item NO_RECURSIVE_FUNCTION_CSE
4758 Define this macro if it is as good or better for a function to call
4759 itself with an explicit address than to call an address kept in a
4763 @item ADJUST_COST (@var{insn}, @var{link}, @var{dep_insn}, @var{cost})
4764 A C statement (sans semicolon) to update the integer variable @var{cost}
4765 based on the relationship between @var{insn} that is dependent on
4766 @var{dep_insn} through the dependence @var{link}. The default is to
4767 make no adjustment to @var{cost}. This can be used for example to
4768 specify to the scheduler that an output- or anti-dependence does not
4769 incur the same cost as a data-dependence.
4771 @findex ADJUST_PRIORITY
4772 @item ADJUST_PRIORITY (@var{insn})
4773 A C statement (sans semicolon) to update the integer scheduling
4774 priority @code{INSN_PRIORITY(@var{insn})}. Reduce the priority
4775 to execute the @var{insn} earlier, increase the priority to execute
4776 @var{insn} later. Do not define this macro if you do not need to
4777 adjust the scheduling priorities of insns.
4781 @section Dividing the Output into Sections (Texts, Data, @dots{})
4782 @c the above section title is WAY too long. maybe cut the part between
4783 @c the (...)? --mew 10feb93
4785 An object file is divided into sections containing different types of
4786 data. In the most common case, there are three sections: the @dfn{text
4787 section}, which holds instructions and read-only data; the @dfn{data
4788 section}, which holds initialized writable data; and the @dfn{bss
4789 section}, which holds uninitialized data. Some systems have other kinds
4792 The compiler must tell the assembler when to switch sections. These
4793 macros control what commands to output to tell the assembler this. You
4794 can also define additional sections.
4797 @findex TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4798 @item TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4799 A C expression whose value is a string containing the assembler
4800 operation that should precede instructions and read-only data. Normally
4801 @code{".text"} is right.
4803 @findex DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4804 @item DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4805 A C expression whose value is a string containing the assembler
4806 operation to identify the following data as writable initialized data.
4807 Normally @code{".data"} is right.
4809 @findex SHARED_SECTION_ASM_OP
4810 @item SHARED_SECTION_ASM_OP
4811 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4812 assembler operation to identify the following data as shared data. If
4813 not defined, @code{DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP} will be used.
4815 @findex BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4816 @item BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4817 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4818 assembler operation to identify the following data as uninitialized global
4819 data. If not defined, and neither @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS} nor
4820 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS} are defined, uninitialized global data will be
4821 output in the data section if @samp{-fno-common} is passed, otherwise
4822 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} will be used.
4824 @findex SHARED_BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4825 @item SHARED_BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4826 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4827 assembler operation to identify the following data as uninitialized global
4828 shared data. If not defined, and @code{BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP} is, the latter
4831 @findex INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4832 @item INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4833 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4834 assembler operation to identify the following data as initialization
4835 code. If not defined, GNU CC will assume such a section does not
4838 @findex EXTRA_SECTIONS
4841 @item EXTRA_SECTIONS
4842 A list of names for sections other than the standard two, which are
4843 @code{in_text} and @code{in_data}. You need not define this macro
4844 on a system with no other sections (that GCC needs to use).
4846 @findex EXTRA_SECTION_FUNCTIONS
4847 @findex text_section
4848 @findex data_section
4849 @item EXTRA_SECTION_FUNCTIONS
4850 One or more functions to be defined in @file{varasm.c}. These
4851 functions should do jobs analogous to those of @code{text_section} and
4852 @code{data_section}, for your additional sections. Do not define this
4853 macro if you do not define @code{EXTRA_SECTIONS}.
4855 @findex READONLY_DATA_SECTION
4856 @item READONLY_DATA_SECTION
4857 On most machines, read-only variables, constants, and jump tables are
4858 placed in the text section. If this is not the case on your machine,
4859 this macro should be defined to be the name of a function (either
4860 @code{data_section} or a function defined in @code{EXTRA_SECTIONS}) that
4861 switches to the section to be used for read-only items.
4863 If these items should be placed in the text section, this macro should
4866 @findex SELECT_SECTION
4867 @item SELECT_SECTION (@var{exp}, @var{reloc})
4868 A C statement or statements to switch to the appropriate section for
4869 output of @var{exp}. You can assume that @var{exp} is either a
4870 @code{VAR_DECL} node or a constant of some sort. @var{reloc}
4871 indicates whether the initial value of @var{exp} requires link-time
4872 relocations. Select the section by calling @code{text_section} or one
4873 of the alternatives for other sections.
4875 Do not define this macro if you put all read-only variables and
4876 constants in the read-only data section (usually the text section).
4878 @findex SELECT_RTX_SECTION
4879 @item SELECT_RTX_SECTION (@var{mode}, @var{rtx})
4880 A C statement or statements to switch to the appropriate section for
4881 output of @var{rtx} in mode @var{mode}. You can assume that @var{rtx}
4882 is some kind of constant in RTL. The argument @var{mode} is redundant
4883 except in the case of a @code{const_int} rtx. Select the section by
4884 calling @code{text_section} or one of the alternatives for other
4887 Do not define this macro if you put all constants in the read-only
4890 @findex JUMP_TABLES_IN_TEXT_SECTION
4891 @item JUMP_TABLES_IN_TEXT_SECTION
4892 Define this macro to be an expression with a non-zero value if jump
4893 tables (for @code{tablejump} insns) should be output in the text
4894 section, along with the assembler instructions. Otherwise, the
4895 readonly data section is used.
4897 This macro is irrelevant if there is no separate readonly data section.
4899 @findex ENCODE_SECTION_INFO
4900 @item ENCODE_SECTION_INFO (@var{decl})
4901 Define this macro if references to a symbol must be treated differently
4902 depending on something about the variable or function named by the
4903 symbol (such as what section it is in).
4905 The macro definition, if any, is executed immediately after the rtl for
4906 @var{decl} has been created and stored in @code{DECL_RTL (@var{decl})}.
4907 The value of the rtl will be a @code{mem} whose address is a
4910 @cindex @code{SYMBOL_REF_FLAG}, in @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO}
4911 The usual thing for this macro to do is to record a flag in the
4912 @code{symbol_ref} (such as @code{SYMBOL_REF_FLAG}) or to store a
4913 modified name string in the @code{symbol_ref} (if one bit is not enough
4916 @findex STRIP_NAME_ENCODING
4917 @item STRIP_NAME_ENCODING (@var{var}, @var{sym_name})
4918 Decode @var{sym_name} and store the real name part in @var{var}, sans
4919 the characters that encode section info. Define this macro if
4920 @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} alters the symbol's name string.
4922 @findex UNIQUE_SECTION_P
4923 @item UNIQUE_SECTION_P (@var{decl})
4924 A C expression which evaluates to true if @var{decl} should be placed
4925 into a unique section for some target-specific reason. If you do not
4926 define this macro, the default is @samp{0}. Note that the flag
4927 @samp{-ffunction-sections} will also cause functions to be placed into
4930 @findex UNIQUE_SECTION
4931 @item UNIQUE_SECTION (@var{decl}, @var{reloc})
4932 A C statement to build up a unique section name, expressed as a
4933 STRING_CST node, and assign it to @samp{DECL_SECTION_NAME (@var{decl})}.
4934 @var{reloc} indicates whether the initial value of @var{exp} requires
4935 link-time relocations. If you do not define this macro, GNU CC will use
4936 the symbol name prefixed by @samp{.} as the section name.
4940 @section Position Independent Code
4941 @cindex position independent code
4944 This section describes macros that help implement generation of position
4945 independent code. Simply defining these macros is not enough to
4946 generate valid PIC; you must also add support to the macros
4947 @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS} and @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}, as
4948 well as @code{LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS}. You must modify the definition of
4949 @samp{movsi} to do something appropriate when the source operand
4950 contains a symbolic address. You may also need to alter the handling of
4951 switch statements so that they use relative addresses.
4952 @c i rearranged the order of the macros above to try to force one of
4953 @c them to the next line, to eliminate an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
4956 @findex PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
4957 @item PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
4958 The register number of the register used to address a table of static
4959 data addresses in memory. In some cases this register is defined by a
4960 processor's ``application binary interface'' (ABI). When this macro
4961 is defined, RTL is generated for this register once, as with the stack
4962 pointer and frame pointer registers. If this macro is not defined, it
4963 is up to the machine-dependent files to allocate such a register (if
4966 @findex PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REG_CALL_CLOBBERED
4967 @item PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REG_CALL_CLOBBERED
4968 Define this macro if the register defined by
4969 @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is clobbered by calls. Do not define
4970 this macro if @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is not defined.
4972 @findex FINALIZE_PIC
4974 By generating position-independent code, when two different programs (A
4975 and B) share a common library (libC.a), the text of the library can be
4976 shared whether or not the library is linked at the same address for both
4977 programs. In some of these environments, position-independent code
4978 requires not only the use of different addressing modes, but also
4979 special code to enable the use of these addressing modes.
4981 The @code{FINALIZE_PIC} macro serves as a hook to emit these special
4982 codes once the function is being compiled into assembly code, but not
4983 before. (It is not done before, because in the case of compiling an
4984 inline function, it would lead to multiple PIC prologues being
4985 included in functions which used inline functions and were compiled to
4988 @findex LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P
4989 @item LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P (@var{x})
4990 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} is a legitimate immediate
4991 operand on the target machine when generating position independent code.
4992 You can assume that @var{x} satisfies @code{CONSTANT_P}, so you need not
4993 check this. You can also assume @var{flag_pic} is true, so you need not
4994 check it either. You need not define this macro if all constants
4995 (including @code{SYMBOL_REF}) can be immediate operands when generating
4996 position independent code.
4999 @node Assembler Format
5000 @section Defining the Output Assembler Language
5002 This section describes macros whose principal purpose is to describe how
5003 to write instructions in assembler language--rather than what the
5007 * File Framework:: Structural information for the assembler file.
5008 * Data Output:: Output of constants (numbers, strings, addresses).
5009 * Uninitialized Data:: Output of uninitialized variables.
5010 * Label Output:: Output and generation of labels.
5011 * Initialization:: General principles of initialization
5012 and termination routines.
5013 * Macros for Initialization::
5014 Specific macros that control the handling of
5015 initialization and termination routines.
5016 * Instruction Output:: Output of actual instructions.
5017 * Dispatch Tables:: Output of jump tables.
5018 * Exception Region Output:: Output of exception region code.
5019 * Alignment Output:: Pseudo ops for alignment and skipping data.
5022 @node File Framework
5023 @subsection The Overall Framework of an Assembler File
5024 @cindex assembler format
5025 @cindex output of assembler code
5027 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5028 This describes the overall framework of an assembler file.
5031 @findex ASM_FILE_START
5032 @item ASM_FILE_START (@var{stream})
5033 A C expression which outputs to the stdio stream @var{stream}
5034 some appropriate text to go at the start of an assembler file.
5036 Normally this macro is defined to output a line containing
5037 @samp{#NO_APP}, which is a comment that has no effect on most
5038 assemblers but tells the GNU assembler that it can save time by not
5039 checking for certain assembler constructs.
5041 On systems that use SDB, it is necessary to output certain commands;
5042 see @file{attasm.h}.
5044 @findex ASM_FILE_END
5045 @item ASM_FILE_END (@var{stream})
5046 A C expression which outputs to the stdio stream @var{stream}
5047 some appropriate text to go at the end of an assembler file.
5049 If this macro is not defined, the default is to output nothing
5050 special at the end of the file. Most systems don't require any
5053 On systems that use SDB, it is necessary to output certain commands;
5054 see @file{attasm.h}.
5056 @findex ASM_IDENTIFY_GCC
5057 @item ASM_IDENTIFY_GCC (@var{file})
5058 A C statement to output assembler commands which will identify
5059 the object file as having been compiled with GNU CC (or another
5062 If you don't define this macro, the string @samp{gcc_compiled.:}
5063 is output. This string is calculated to define a symbol which,
5064 on BSD systems, will never be defined for any other reason.
5065 GDB checks for the presence of this symbol when reading the
5066 symbol table of an executable.
5068 On non-BSD systems, you must arrange communication with GDB in
5069 some other fashion. If GDB is not used on your system, you can
5070 define this macro with an empty body.
5072 @findex ASM_COMMENT_START
5073 @item ASM_COMMENT_START
5074 A C string constant describing how to begin a comment in the target
5075 assembler language. The compiler assumes that the comment will end at
5076 the end of the line.
5080 A C string constant for text to be output before each @code{asm}
5081 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5082 @code{"#APP"}, which is a comment that has no effect on most
5083 assemblers but tells the GNU assembler that it must check the lines
5084 that follow for all valid assembler constructs.
5088 A C string constant for text to be output after each @code{asm}
5089 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5090 @code{"#NO_APP"}, which tells the GNU assembler to resume making the
5091 time-saving assumptions that are valid for ordinary compiler output.
5093 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME
5094 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5095 A C statement to output COFF information or DWARF debugging information
5096 which indicates that filename @var{name} is the current source file to
5097 the stdio stream @var{stream}.
5099 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
5100 for the file format in use is appropriate.
5102 @findex OUTPUT_QUOTED_STRING
5103 @item OUTPUT_QUOTED_STRING (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5104 A C statement to output the string @var{string} to the stdio stream
5105 @var{stream}. If you do not call the function @code{output_quoted_string}
5106 in your config files, GNU CC will only call it to output filenames to
5107 the assembler source. So you can use it to canonicalize the format
5108 of the filename using this macro.
5110 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE
5111 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE (@var{stream}, @var{line})
5112 A C statement to output DBX or SDB debugging information before code
5113 for line number @var{line} of the current source file to the
5114 stdio stream @var{stream}.
5116 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of debugging
5117 information for the debugger in use is appropriate.
5119 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_IDENT
5120 @item ASM_OUTPUT_IDENT (@var{stream}, @var{string})
5121 A C statement to output something to the assembler file to handle a
5122 @samp{#ident} directive containing the text @var{string}. If this
5123 macro is not defined, nothing is output for a @samp{#ident} directive.
5125 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SECTION_NAME
5126 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SECTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{reloc})
5127 A C statement to output something to the assembler file to switch to section
5128 @var{name} for object @var{decl} which is either a @code{FUNCTION_DECL}, a
5129 @code{VAR_DECL} or @code{NULL_TREE}. @var{reloc}
5130 indicates whether the initial value of @var{exp} requires link-time
5131 relocations. Some target formats do not support
5132 arbitrary sections. Do not define this macro in such cases.
5134 At present this macro is only used to support section attributes.
5135 When this macro is undefined, section attributes are disabled.
5137 @findex OBJC_PROLOGUE
5139 A C statement to output any assembler statements which are required to
5140 precede any Objective C object definitions or message sending. The
5141 statement is executed only when compiling an Objective C program.
5146 @subsection Output of Data
5148 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5149 This describes data output.
5152 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LONG_DOUBLE
5153 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE
5154 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_FLOAT
5155 @item ASM_OUTPUT_LONG_DOUBLE (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5156 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5157 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_FLOAT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5158 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_THREE_QUARTER_FLOAT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5159 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_SHORT_FLOAT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5160 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_BYTE_FLOAT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5161 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5162 instruction to assemble a floating-point constant of @code{TFmode},
5163 @code{DFmode}, @code{SFmode}, @code{TQFmode}, @code{HFmode}, or
5164 @code{QFmode}, respectively, whose value is @var{value}. @var{value}
5165 will be a C expression of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}. Macros such as
5166 @code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE} are useful for writing these
5169 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_QUADRUPLE_INT
5170 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE_INT
5171 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_INT
5172 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SHORT
5173 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_CHAR
5174 @findex output_addr_const
5175 @item ASM_OUTPUT_QUADRUPLE_INT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5176 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE_INT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5177 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_INT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5178 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_SHORT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5179 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_CHAR (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5180 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5181 instruction to assemble an integer of 16, 8, 4, 2 or 1 bytes,
5182 respectively, whose value is @var{value}. The argument @var{exp} will
5183 be an RTL expression which represents a constant value. Use
5184 @samp{output_addr_const (@var{stream}, @var{exp})} to output this value
5185 as an assembler expression.@refill
5187 For sizes larger than @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}, if the action of a macro
5188 would be identical to repeatedly calling the macro corresponding to
5189 a size of @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}, once for each word, you need not define
5192 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_BYTE
5193 @item ASM_OUTPUT_BYTE (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5194 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5195 instruction to assemble a single byte containing the number @var{value}.
5199 A C string constant giving the pseudo-op to use for a sequence of
5200 single-byte constants. If this macro is not defined, the default is
5203 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII
5204 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII (@var{stream}, @var{ptr}, @var{len})
5205 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5206 instruction to assemble a string constant containing the @var{len}
5207 bytes at @var{ptr}. @var{ptr} will be a C expression of type
5208 @code{char *} and @var{len} a C expression of type @code{int}.
5210 If the assembler has a @code{.ascii} pseudo-op as found in the
5211 Berkeley Unix assembler, do not define the macro
5212 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII}.
5214 @findex CONSTANT_POOL_BEFORE_FUNCTION
5215 @item CONSTANT_POOL_BEFORE_FUNCTION
5216 You may define this macro as a C expression. You should define the
5217 expression to have a non-zero value if GNU CC should output the constant
5218 pool for a function before the code for the function, or a zero value if
5219 GNU CC should output the constant pool after the function. If you do
5220 not define this macro, the usual case, GNU CC will output the constant
5221 pool before the function.
5223 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_PROLOGUE
5224 @item ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_PROLOGUE (@var{file} @var{funname} @var{fundecl} @var{size})
5225 A C statement to output assembler commands to define the start of the
5226 constant pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving
5227 the name of the function. Should the return type of the function
5228 be required, it can be obtained via @var{fundecl}. @var{size}
5229 is the size, in bytes, of the constant pool that will be written
5230 immediately after this call.
5232 If no constant-pool prefix is required, the usual case, this macro need
5235 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SPECIAL_POOL_ENTRY
5236 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SPECIAL_POOL_ENTRY (@var{file}, @var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{align}, @var{labelno}, @var{jumpto})
5237 A C statement (with or without semicolon) to output a constant in the
5238 constant pool, if it needs special treatment. (This macro need not do
5239 anything for RTL expressions that can be output normally.)
5241 The argument @var{file} is the standard I/O stream to output the
5242 assembler code on. @var{x} is the RTL expression for the constant to
5243 output, and @var{mode} is the machine mode (in case @var{x} is a
5244 @samp{const_int}). @var{align} is the required alignment for the value
5245 @var{x}; you should output an assembler directive to force this much
5248 The argument @var{labelno} is a number to use in an internal label for
5249 the address of this pool entry. The definition of this macro is
5250 responsible for outputting the label definition at the proper place.
5251 Here is how to do this:
5254 ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{file}, "LC", @var{labelno});
5257 When you output a pool entry specially, you should end with a
5258 @code{goto} to the label @var{jumpto}. This will prevent the same pool
5259 entry from being output a second time in the usual manner.
5261 You need not define this macro if it would do nothing.
5263 @findex CONSTANT_AFTER_FUNCTION_P
5264 @item CONSTANT_AFTER_FUNCTION_P (@var{exp})
5265 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if the constant
5266 @var{exp}, of type @code{tree}, should be output after the code for a
5267 function. The compiler will normally output all constants before the
5268 function; you need not define this macro if this is OK.
5270 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_EPILOGUE
5271 @item ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_EPILOGUE (@var{file} @var{funname} @var{fundecl} @var{size})
5272 A C statement to output assembler commands to at the end of the constant
5273 pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving the name of the
5274 function. Should the return type of the function be required, you can
5275 obtain it via @var{fundecl}. @var{size} is the size, in bytes, of the
5276 constant pool that GNU CC wrote immediately before this call.
5278 If no constant-pool epilogue is required, the usual case, you need not
5281 @findex IS_ASM_LOGICAL_LINE_SEPARATOR
5282 @item IS_ASM_LOGICAL_LINE_SEPARATOR (@var{C})
5283 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if @var{C} is
5284 used as a logical line separator by the assembler.
5286 If you do not define this macro, the default is that only
5287 the character @samp{;} is treated as a logical line separator.
5290 @findex ASM_OPEN_PAREN
5291 @findex ASM_CLOSE_PAREN
5292 @item ASM_OPEN_PAREN
5293 @itemx ASM_CLOSE_PAREN
5294 These macros are defined as C string constant, describing the syntax
5295 in the assembler for grouping arithmetic expressions. The following
5296 definitions are correct for most assemblers:
5299 #define ASM_OPEN_PAREN "("
5300 #define ASM_CLOSE_PAREN ")"
5304 These macros are provided by @file{real.h} for writing the definitions
5305 of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE} and the like:
5308 @item REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5309 @itemx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5310 @itemx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5311 @findex REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE
5312 @findex REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE
5313 @findex REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE
5314 These translate @var{x}, of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, to the target's
5315 floating point representation, and store its bit pattern in the array of
5316 @code{long int} whose address is @var{l}. The number of elements in the
5317 output array is determined by the size of the desired target floating
5318 point data type: 32 bits of it go in each @code{long int} array
5319 element. Each array element holds 32 bits of the result, even if
5320 @code{long int} is wider than 32 bits on the host machine.
5322 The array element values are designed so that you can print them out
5323 using @code{fprintf} in the order they should appear in the target
5326 @item REAL_VALUE_TO_DECIMAL (@var{x}, @var{format}, @var{string})
5327 @findex REAL_VALUE_TO_DECIMAL
5328 This macro converts @var{x}, of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, to a
5329 decimal number and stores it as a string into @var{string}.
5330 You must pass, as @var{string}, the address of a long enough block
5331 of space to hold the result.
5333 The argument @var{format} is a @code{printf}-specification that serves
5334 as a suggestion for how to format the output string.
5337 @node Uninitialized Data
5338 @subsection Output of Uninitialized Variables
5340 Each of the macros in this section is used to do the whole job of
5341 outputting a single uninitialized variable.
5344 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON
5345 @item ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5346 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5347 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a common-label named
5348 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5349 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5351 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5352 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5353 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5355 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5356 common global variables are output.
5358 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON
5359 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5360 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} except takes the required alignment as a
5361 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5362 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}, and gives you more flexibility in
5363 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5364 as the number of bits.
5366 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON
5367 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5368 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON} except that @var{decl} of the
5369 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5370 is not corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GNU CC wil use it
5371 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} and
5372 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON}. Define this macro when you need to see
5373 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5375 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_COMMON
5376 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5377 If defined, it is similar to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}, except that it
5378 is used when @var{name} is shared. If not defined, @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}
5381 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_BSS
5382 @item ASM_OUTPUT_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5383 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5384 @var{stream} the assembler definition of uninitialized global @var{decl} named
5385 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5386 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5388 Try to use function @code{asm_output_bss} defined in @file{varasm.c} when
5389 defining this macro. If unable, use the expression
5390 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name itself;
5391 before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax for defining
5392 the name, and a newline.
5394 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized global
5395 variables are output. This macro exists to properly support languages like
5396 @code{c++} which do not have @code{common} data. However, this macro currently
5397 is not defined for all targets. If this macro and
5398 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS} are not defined then @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}
5399 or @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON} or
5400 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON} is used.
5402 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS
5403 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5404 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS} except takes the required alignment as a
5405 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5406 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS}, and gives you more flexibility in
5407 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5408 as the number of bits.
5410 Try to use function @code{asm_output_aligned_bss} defined in file
5411 @file{varasm.c} when defining this macro.
5413 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_BSS
5414 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5415 If defined, it is similar to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS}, except that it
5416 is used when @var{name} is shared. If not defined, @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS}
5419 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL
5420 @item ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5421 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5422 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a local-common-label named
5423 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5424 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5426 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5427 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5428 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5430 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5431 static variables are output.
5433 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL
5434 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5435 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL} except takes the required alignment as a
5436 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5437 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}, and gives you more flexibility in
5438 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5439 as the number of bits.
5441 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_LOCAL
5442 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5443 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL} except that @var{decl} of the
5444 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5445 is not corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GNU CC wil use it
5446 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DECL} and
5447 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL}. Define this macro when you need to see
5448 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5451 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_LOCAL
5452 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5453 If defined, it is similar to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}, except that it
5454 is used when @var{name} is shared. If not defined, @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}
5459 @subsection Output and Generation of Labels
5461 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5462 This is about outputting labels.
5465 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL
5466 @findex assemble_name
5467 @item ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5468 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5469 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name}.
5470 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5471 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5472 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5474 @findex ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_NAME
5475 @item ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5476 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5477 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of a
5478 function which is being defined. This macro is responsible for
5479 outputting the label definition (perhaps using
5480 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}). The argument @var{decl} is the
5481 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5483 If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
5484 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5486 @findex ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_SIZE
5487 @item ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5488 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5489 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the size of a function
5490 which is being defined. The argument @var{name} is the name of the
5491 function. The argument @var{decl} is the @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node
5492 representing the function.
5494 If this macro is not defined, then the function size is not defined.
5496 @findex ASM_DECLARE_OBJECT_NAME
5497 @item ASM_DECLARE_OBJECT_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5498 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5499 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of an
5500 initialized variable which is being defined. This macro must output the
5501 label definition (perhaps using @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}). The argument
5502 @var{decl} is the @code{VAR_DECL} tree node representing the variable.
5504 If this macro is not defined, then the variable name is defined in the
5505 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5507 @findex ASM_FINISH_DECLARE_OBJECT
5508 @item ASM_FINISH_DECLARE_OBJECT (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{toplevel}, @var{atend})
5509 A C statement (sans semicolon) to finish up declaring a variable name
5510 once the compiler has processed its initializer fully and thus has had a
5511 chance to determine the size of an array when controlled by an
5512 initializer. This is used on systems where it's necessary to declare
5513 something about the size of the object.
5515 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5518 @findex ASM_GLOBALIZE_LABEL
5519 @item ASM_GLOBALIZE_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5520 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5521 @var{stream} some commands that will make the label @var{name} global;
5522 that is, available for reference from other files. Use the expression
5523 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name
5524 itself; before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax
5525 for making that name global, and a newline.
5527 @findex ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL
5528 @item ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL
5529 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5530 @var{stream} some commands that will make the label @var{name} weak;
5531 that is, available for reference from other files but only used if
5532 no other definition is available. Use the expression
5533 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name
5534 itself; before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax
5535 for making that name weak, and a newline.
5537 If you don't define this macro, GNU CC will not support weak
5538 symbols and you should not define the @code{SUPPORTS_WEAK} macro.
5540 @findex SUPPORTS_WEAK
5542 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports weak symbols.
5544 If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
5545 definition. If @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} is defined, the default
5546 definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}. Define this macro if
5547 you want to control weak symbol support with a compiler flag such as
5550 @findex MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY (@var{decl})
5551 @item MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY
5552 A C statement (sans semicolon) to mark @var{decl} to be emitted as a
5553 public symbol such that extra copies in multiple translation units will
5554 be discarded by the linker. Define this macro if your object file
5555 format provides support for this concept, such as the @samp{COMDAT}
5556 section flags in the Microsoft Windows PE/COFF format, and this support
5557 requires changes to @var{decl}, such as putting it in a separate section.
5559 @findex SUPPORTS_ONE_ONLY
5560 @item SUPPORTS_ONE_ONLY
5561 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports one-only
5564 If you don't define this macro, @file{varasm.c} provides a default
5565 definition. If @code{MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY} is defined, the default
5566 definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}. Define this macro if
5567 you want to control one-only symbol support with a compiler flag, or if
5568 setting the @code{DECL_ONE_ONLY} flag is enough to mark a declaration to
5569 be emitted as one-only.
5571 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL
5572 @item ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name})
5573 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5574 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name of an external
5575 symbol named @var{name} which is referenced in this compilation but
5576 not defined. The value of @var{decl} is the tree node for the
5579 This macro need not be defined if it does not need to output anything.
5580 The GNU assembler and most Unix assemblers don't require anything.
5582 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL_LIBCALL
5583 @item ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL_LIBCALL (@var{stream}, @var{symref})
5584 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output on @var{stream} an assembler
5585 pseudo-op to declare a library function name external. The name of the
5586 library function is given by @var{symref}, which has type @code{rtx} and
5587 is a @code{symbol_ref}.
5589 This macro need not be defined if it does not need to output anything.
5590 The GNU assembler and most Unix assemblers don't require anything.
5592 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF
5593 @item ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5594 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5595 @var{stream} a reference in assembler syntax to a label named
5596 @var{name}. This should add @samp{_} to the front of the name, if that
5597 is customary on your operating system, as it is in most Berkeley Unix
5598 systems. This macro is used in @code{assemble_name}.
5600 @ignore @c Seems not to exist anymore.
5601 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF_AS_INT
5602 @item ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF_AS_INT (@var{file}, @var{label})
5603 Define this macro for systems that use the program @code{collect2}.
5604 The definition should be a C statement to output a word containing
5605 a reference to the label @var{label}.
5608 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL
5609 @item ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5610 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} a label whose
5611 name is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number @var{num}.
5613 It is absolutely essential that these labels be distinct from the labels
5614 used for user-level functions and variables. Otherwise, certain programs
5615 will have name conflicts with internal labels.
5617 It is desirable to exclude internal labels from the symbol table of the
5618 object file. Most assemblers have a naming convention for labels that
5619 should be excluded; on many systems, the letter @samp{L} at the
5620 beginning of a label has this effect. You should find out what
5621 convention your system uses, and follow it.
5623 The usual definition of this macro is as follows:
5626 fprintf (@var{stream}, "L%s%d:\n", @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5629 @findex ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL
5630 @item ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{string}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5631 A C statement to store into the string @var{string} a label whose name
5632 is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number @var{num}.
5634 This string, when output subsequently by @code{assemble_name}, should
5635 produce the output that @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL} would produce
5636 with the same @var{prefix} and @var{num}.
5638 If the string begins with @samp{*}, then @code{assemble_name} will
5639 output the rest of the string unchanged. It is often convenient for
5640 @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} to use @samp{*} in this way. If the
5641 string doesn't start with @samp{*}, then @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} gets
5642 to output the string, and may change it. (Of course,
5643 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} is also part of your machine description, so
5644 you should know what it does on your machine.)
5646 @findex ASM_FORMAT_PRIVATE_NAME
5647 @item ASM_FORMAT_PRIVATE_NAME (@var{outvar}, @var{name}, @var{number})
5648 A C expression to assign to @var{outvar} (which is a variable of type
5649 @code{char *}) a newly allocated string made from the string
5650 @var{name} and the number @var{number}, with some suitable punctuation
5651 added. Use @code{alloca} to get space for the string.
5653 The string will be used as an argument to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} to
5654 produce an assembler label for an internal static variable whose name is
5655 @var{name}. Therefore, the string must be such as to result in valid
5656 assembler code. The argument @var{number} is different each time this
5657 macro is executed; it prevents conflicts between similarly-named
5658 internal static variables in different scopes.
5660 Ideally this string should not be a valid C identifier, to prevent any
5661 conflict with the user's own symbols. Most assemblers allow periods
5662 or percent signs in assembler symbols; putting at least one of these
5663 between the name and the number will suffice.
5665 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DEF
5666 @item ASM_OUTPUT_DEF (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5667 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5668 which defines (equates) the symbol @var{name} to have the value @var{value}.
5670 If SET_ASM_OP is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5671 correct for most systems.
5673 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DEFINE_LABEL_DIFFERENCE_SYMBOL
5674 @item ASM_OUTPUT_DEFINE_LABEL_DIFFERENCE_SYMBOL (@var{stream}, @var{symbol}, @var{high}, @var{low})
5675 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5676 which defines (equates) the symbol @var{symbol} to have a value equal to
5677 the difference of the two symbols @var{high} and @var{low}, i.e.
5678 @var{high} minus @var{low}. GNU CC guarantees that the symbols @var{high}
5679 and @var{low} are already known by the assembler so that the difference
5680 resolves into a constant.
5682 If SET_ASM_OP is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5683 correct for most systems.
5685 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS
5686 @item ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5687 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5688 which defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
5691 Define this macro if the target only supports weak aliases; define
5692 ASM_OUTPUT_DEF instead if possible.
5694 @findex OBJC_GEN_METHOD_LABEL
5695 @item OBJC_GEN_METHOD_LABEL (@var{buf}, @var{is_inst}, @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name}, @var{sel_name})
5696 Define this macro to override the default assembler names used for
5697 Objective C methods.
5699 The default name is a unique method number followed by the name of the
5700 class (e.g.@: @samp{_1_Foo}). For methods in categories, the name of
5701 the category is also included in the assembler name (e.g.@:
5704 These names are safe on most systems, but make debugging difficult since
5705 the method's selector is not present in the name. Therefore, particular
5706 systems define other ways of computing names.
5708 @var{buf} is an expression of type @code{char *} which gives you a
5709 buffer in which to store the name; its length is as long as
5710 @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name} and @var{sel_name} put together, plus
5711 50 characters extra.
5713 The argument @var{is_inst} specifies whether the method is an instance
5714 method or a class method; @var{class_name} is the name of the class;
5715 @var{cat_name} is the name of the category (or NULL if the method is not
5716 in a category); and @var{sel_name} is the name of the selector.
5718 On systems where the assembler can handle quoted names, you can use this
5719 macro to provide more human-readable names.
5722 @node Initialization
5723 @subsection How Initialization Functions Are Handled
5724 @cindex initialization routines
5725 @cindex termination routines
5726 @cindex constructors, output of
5727 @cindex destructors, output of
5729 The compiled code for certain languages includes @dfn{constructors}
5730 (also called @dfn{initialization routines})---functions to initialize
5731 data in the program when the program is started. These functions need
5732 to be called before the program is ``started''---that is to say, before
5733 @code{main} is called.
5735 Compiling some languages generates @dfn{destructors} (also called
5736 @dfn{termination routines}) that should be called when the program
5739 To make the initialization and termination functions work, the compiler
5740 must output something in the assembler code to cause those functions to
5741 be called at the appropriate time. When you port the compiler to a new
5742 system, you need to specify how to do this.
5744 There are two major ways that GCC currently supports the execution of
5745 initialization and termination functions. Each way has two variants.
5746 Much of the structure is common to all four variations.
5748 @findex __CTOR_LIST__
5749 @findex __DTOR_LIST__
5750 The linker must build two lists of these functions---a list of
5751 initialization functions, called @code{__CTOR_LIST__}, and a list of
5752 termination functions, called @code{__DTOR_LIST__}.
5754 Each list always begins with an ignored function pointer (which may hold
5755 0, @minus{}1, or a count of the function pointers after it, depending on
5756 the environment). This is followed by a series of zero or more function
5757 pointers to constructors (or destructors), followed by a function
5758 pointer containing zero.
5760 Depending on the operating system and its executable file format, either
5761 @file{crtstuff.c} or @file{libgcc2.c} traverses these lists at startup
5762 time and exit time. Constructors are called in reverse order of the
5763 list; destructors in forward order.
5765 The best way to handle static constructors works only for object file
5766 formats which provide arbitrarily-named sections. A section is set
5767 aside for a list of constructors, and another for a list of destructors.
5768 Traditionally these are called @samp{.ctors} and @samp{.dtors}. Each
5769 object file that defines an initialization function also puts a word in
5770 the constructor section to point to that function. The linker
5771 accumulates all these words into one contiguous @samp{.ctors} section.
5772 Termination functions are handled similarly.
5774 To use this method, you need appropriate definitions of the macros
5775 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} and @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR}. Usually
5776 you can get them by including @file{svr4.h}.
5778 When arbitrary sections are available, there are two variants, depending
5779 upon how the code in @file{crtstuff.c} is called. On systems that
5780 support an @dfn{init} section which is executed at program startup,
5781 parts of @file{crtstuff.c} are compiled into that section. The
5782 program is linked by the @code{gcc} driver like this:
5785 ld -o @var{output_file} crtbegin.o @dots{} crtend.o -lgcc
5788 The head of a function (@code{__do_global_ctors}) appears in the init
5789 section of @file{crtbegin.o}; the remainder of the function appears in
5790 the init section of @file{crtend.o}. The linker will pull these two
5791 parts of the section together, making a whole function. If any of the
5792 user's object files linked into the middle of it contribute code, then that
5793 code will be executed as part of the body of @code{__do_global_ctors}.
5795 To use this variant, you must define the @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}
5798 If no init section is available, do not define
5799 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}. Then @code{__do_global_ctors} is built into
5800 the text section like all other functions, and resides in
5801 @file{libgcc.a}. When GCC compiles any function called @code{main}, it
5802 inserts a procedure call to @code{__main} as the first executable code
5803 after the function prologue. The @code{__main} function, also defined
5804 in @file{libgcc2.c}, simply calls @file{__do_global_ctors}.
5806 In file formats that don't support arbitrary sections, there are again
5807 two variants. In the simplest variant, the GNU linker (GNU @code{ld})
5808 and an `a.out' format must be used. In this case,
5809 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} is defined to produce a @code{.stabs}
5810 entry of type @samp{N_SETT}, referencing the name @code{__CTOR_LIST__},
5811 and with the address of the void function containing the initialization
5812 code as its value. The GNU linker recognizes this as a request to add
5813 the value to a ``set''; the values are accumulated, and are eventually
5814 placed in the executable as a vector in the format described above, with
5815 a leading (ignored) count and a trailing zero element.
5816 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR} is handled similarly. Since no init
5817 section is available, the absence of @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} causes
5818 the compilation of @code{main} to call @code{__main} as above, starting
5819 the initialization process.
5821 The last variant uses neither arbitrary sections nor the GNU linker.
5822 This is preferable when you want to do dynamic linking and when using
5823 file formats which the GNU linker does not support, such as `ECOFF'. In
5824 this case, @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} does not produce an
5825 @code{N_SETT} symbol; initialization and termination functions are
5826 recognized simply by their names. This requires an extra program in the
5827 linkage step, called @code{collect2}. This program pretends to be the
5828 linker, for use with GNU CC; it does its job by running the ordinary
5829 linker, but also arranges to include the vectors of initialization and
5830 termination functions. These functions are called via @code{__main} as
5833 Choosing among these configuration options has been simplified by a set
5834 of operating-system-dependent files in the @file{config} subdirectory.
5835 These files define all of the relevant parameters. Usually it is
5836 sufficient to include one into your specific machine-dependent
5837 configuration file. These files are:
5841 For operating systems using the `a.out' format.
5844 For operating systems using the `MachO' format.
5847 For System V Release 3 and similar systems using `COFF' format.
5850 For System V Release 4 and similar systems using `ELF' format.
5853 For the VMS operating system.
5857 The following section describes the specific macros that control and
5858 customize the handling of initialization and termination functions.
5861 @node Macros for Initialization
5862 @subsection Macros Controlling Initialization Routines
5864 Here are the macros that control how the compiler handles initialization
5865 and termination functions:
5868 @findex INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
5869 @item INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
5870 If defined, a C string constant for the assembler operation to identify
5871 the following data as initialization code. If not defined, GNU CC will
5872 assume such a section does not exist. When you are using special
5873 sections for initialization and termination functions, this macro also
5874 controls how @file{crtstuff.c} and @file{libgcc2.c} arrange to run the
5875 initialization functions.
5877 @item HAS_INIT_SECTION
5878 @findex HAS_INIT_SECTION
5879 If defined, @code{main} will not call @code{__main} as described above.
5880 This macro should be defined for systems that control the contents of the
5881 init section on a symbol-by-symbol basis, such as OSF/1, and should not
5882 be defined explicitly for systems that support
5883 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
5885 @item LD_INIT_SWITCH
5886 @findex LD_INIT_SWITCH
5887 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
5888 the following symbol is an initialization routine.
5890 @item LD_FINI_SWITCH
5891 @findex LD_FINI_SWITCH
5892 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
5893 the following symbol is a finalization routine.
5896 @findex INVOKE__main
5897 If defined, @code{main} will call @code{__main} despite the presence of
5898 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}. This macro should be defined for systems
5899 where the init section is not actually run automatically, but is still
5900 useful for collecting the lists of constructors and destructors.
5902 @item ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5903 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR
5904 Define this macro as a C statement to output on the stream @var{stream}
5905 the assembler code to arrange to call the function named @var{name} at
5906 initialization time.
5908 Assume that @var{name} is the name of a C function generated
5909 automatically by the compiler. This function takes no arguments. Use
5910 the function @code{assemble_name} to output the name @var{name}; this
5911 performs any system-specific syntactic transformations such as adding an
5914 If you don't define this macro, nothing special is output to arrange to
5915 call the function. This is correct when the function will be called in
5916 some other manner---for example, by means of the @code{collect2} program,
5917 which looks through the symbol table to find these functions by their
5920 @item ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5921 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR
5922 This is like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} but used for termination
5923 functions rather than initialization functions.
5926 If your system uses @code{collect2} as the means of processing
5927 constructors, then that program normally uses @code{nm} to scan an
5928 object file for constructor functions to be called. On certain kinds of
5929 systems, you can define these macros to make @code{collect2} work faster
5930 (and, in some cases, make it work at all):
5933 @findex OBJECT_FORMAT_COFF
5934 @item OBJECT_FORMAT_COFF
5935 Define this macro if the system uses COFF (Common Object File Format)
5936 object files, so that @code{collect2} can assume this format and scan
5937 object files directly for dynamic constructor/destructor functions.
5939 @findex OBJECT_FORMAT_ROSE
5940 @item OBJECT_FORMAT_ROSE
5941 Define this macro if the system uses ROSE format object files, so that
5942 @code{collect2} can assume this format and scan object files directly
5943 for dynamic constructor/destructor functions.
5945 These macros are effective only in a native compiler; @code{collect2} as
5946 part of a cross compiler always uses @code{nm} for the target machine.
5948 @findex REAL_NM_FILE_NAME
5949 @item REAL_NM_FILE_NAME
5950 Define this macro as a C string constant containing the file name to use
5951 to execute @code{nm}. The default is to search the path normally for
5954 If your system supports shared libraries and has a program to list the
5955 dynamic dependencies of a given library or executable, you can define
5956 these macros to enable support for running initialization and
5957 termination functions in shared libraries:
5961 Define this macro to a C string constant containing the name of the
5962 program which lists dynamic dependencies, like @code{"ldd"} under SunOS 4.
5964 @findex PARSE_LDD_OUTPUT
5965 @item PARSE_LDD_OUTPUT (@var{PTR})
5966 Define this macro to be C code that extracts filenames from the output
5967 of the program denoted by @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. @var{PTR} is a variable
5968 of type @code{char *} that points to the beginning of a line of output
5969 from @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. If the line lists a dynamic dependency, the
5970 code must advance @var{PTR} to the beginning of the filename on that
5971 line. Otherwise, it must set @var{PTR} to @code{NULL}.
5975 @node Instruction Output
5976 @subsection Output of Assembler Instructions
5978 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5979 This describes assembler instruction output.
5982 @findex REGISTER_NAMES
5983 @item REGISTER_NAMES
5984 A C initializer containing the assembler's names for the machine
5985 registers, each one as a C string constant. This is what translates
5986 register numbers in the compiler into assembler language.
5988 @findex ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES
5989 @item ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES
5990 If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a name
5991 and a register number. This macro defines additional names for hard
5992 registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in declarations to refer
5993 to registers using alternate names.
5995 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_OPCODE
5996 @item ASM_OUTPUT_OPCODE (@var{stream}, @var{ptr})
5997 Define this macro if you are using an unusual assembler that
5998 requires different names for the machine instructions.
6000 The definition is a C statement or statements which output an
6001 assembler instruction opcode to the stdio stream @var{stream}. The
6002 macro-operand @var{ptr} is a variable of type @code{char *} which
6003 points to the opcode name in its ``internal'' form---the form that is
6004 written in the machine description. The definition should output the
6005 opcode name to @var{stream}, performing any translation you desire, and
6006 increment the variable @var{ptr} to point at the end of the opcode
6007 so that it will not be output twice.
6009 In fact, your macro definition may process less than the entire opcode
6010 name, or more than the opcode name; but if you want to process text
6011 that includes @samp{%}-sequences to substitute operands, you must take
6012 care of the substitution yourself. Just be sure to increment
6013 @var{ptr} over whatever text should not be output normally.
6015 @findex recog_operand
6016 If you need to look at the operand values, they can be found as the
6017 elements of @code{recog_operand}.
6019 If the macro definition does nothing, the instruction is output
6022 @findex FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN
6023 @item FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN (@var{insn}, @var{opvec}, @var{noperands})
6024 If defined, a C statement to be executed just prior to the output of
6025 assembler code for @var{insn}, to modify the extracted operands so
6026 they will be output differently.
6028 Here the argument @var{opvec} is the vector containing the operands
6029 extracted from @var{insn}, and @var{noperands} is the number of
6030 elements of the vector which contain meaningful data for this insn.
6031 The contents of this vector are what will be used to convert the insn
6032 template into assembler code, so you can change the assembler output
6033 by changing the contents of the vector.
6035 This macro is useful when various assembler syntaxes share a single
6036 file of instruction patterns; by defining this macro differently, you
6037 can cause a large class of instructions to be output differently (such
6038 as with rearranged operands). Naturally, variations in assembler
6039 syntax affecting individual insn patterns ought to be handled by
6040 writing conditional output routines in those patterns.
6042 If this macro is not defined, it is equivalent to a null statement.
6044 @findex FINAL_PRESCAN_LABEL
6045 @item FINAL_PRESCAN_LABEL
6046 If defined, @code{FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN} will be called on each
6047 @code{CODE_LABEL}. In that case, @var{opvec} will be a null pointer and
6048 @var{noperands} will be zero.
6050 @findex PRINT_OPERAND
6051 @item PRINT_OPERAND (@var{stream}, @var{x}, @var{code})
6052 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6053 assembler syntax for an instruction operand @var{x}. @var{x} is an
6056 @var{code} is a value that can be used to specify one of several ways
6057 of printing the operand. It is used when identical operands must be
6058 printed differently depending on the context. @var{code} comes from
6059 the @samp{%} specification that was used to request printing of the
6060 operand. If the specification was just @samp{%@var{digit}} then
6061 @var{code} is 0; if the specification was @samp{%@var{ltr}
6062 @var{digit}} then @var{code} is the ASCII code for @var{ltr}.
6065 If @var{x} is a register, this macro should print the register's name.
6066 The names can be found in an array @code{reg_names} whose type is
6067 @code{char *[]}. @code{reg_names} is initialized from
6068 @code{REGISTER_NAMES}.
6070 When the machine description has a specification @samp{%@var{punct}}
6071 (a @samp{%} followed by a punctuation character), this macro is called
6072 with a null pointer for @var{x} and the punctuation character for
6075 @findex PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P
6076 @item PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P (@var{code})
6077 A C expression which evaluates to true if @var{code} is a valid
6078 punctuation character for use in the @code{PRINT_OPERAND} macro. If
6079 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P} is not defined, it means that no
6080 punctuation characters (except for the standard one, @samp{%}) are used
6083 @findex PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS
6084 @item PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS (@var{stream}, @var{x})
6085 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6086 assembler syntax for an instruction operand that is a memory reference
6087 whose address is @var{x}. @var{x} is an RTL expression.
6089 @cindex @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} usage
6090 On some machines, the syntax for a symbolic address depends on the
6091 section that the address refers to. On these machines, define the macro
6092 @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} to store the information into the
6093 @code{symbol_ref}, and then check for it here. @xref{Assembler Format}.
6095 @findex DBR_OUTPUT_SEQEND
6096 @findex dbr_sequence_length
6097 @item DBR_OUTPUT_SEQEND(@var{file})
6098 A C statement, to be executed after all slot-filler instructions have
6099 been output. If necessary, call @code{dbr_sequence_length} to
6100 determine the number of slots filled in a sequence (zero if not
6101 currently outputting a sequence), to decide how many no-ops to output,
6104 Don't define this macro if it has nothing to do, but it is helpful in
6105 reading assembly output if the extent of the delay sequence is made
6106 explicit (e.g. with white space).
6108 @findex final_sequence
6109 Note that output routines for instructions with delay slots must be
6110 prepared to deal with not being output as part of a sequence (i.e.
6111 when the scheduling pass is not run, or when no slot fillers could be
6112 found.) The variable @code{final_sequence} is null when not
6113 processing a sequence, otherwise it contains the @code{sequence} rtx
6116 @findex REGISTER_PREFIX
6117 @findex LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX
6118 @findex USER_LABEL_PREFIX
6119 @findex IMMEDIATE_PREFIX
6121 @item REGISTER_PREFIX
6122 @itemx LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX
6123 @itemx USER_LABEL_PREFIX
6124 @itemx IMMEDIATE_PREFIX
6125 If defined, C string expressions to be used for the @samp{%R}, @samp{%L},
6126 @samp{%U}, and @samp{%I} options of @code{asm_fprintf} (see
6127 @file{final.c}). These are useful when a single @file{md} file must
6128 support multiple assembler formats. In that case, the various @file{tm.h}
6129 files can define these macros differently.
6131 @findex ASSEMBLER_DIALECT
6132 @item ASSEMBLER_DIALECT
6133 If your target supports multiple dialects of assembler language (such as
6134 different opcodes), define this macro as a C expression that gives the
6135 numeric index of the assembler language dialect to use, with zero as the
6138 If this macro is defined, you may use constructs of the form
6139 @samp{@{option0|option1|option2@dots{}@}} in the output
6140 templates of patterns (@pxref{Output Template}) or in the first argument
6141 of @code{asm_fprintf}. This construct outputs @samp{option0},
6142 @samp{option1} or @samp{option2}, etc., if the value of
6143 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} is zero, one or two, etc. Any special
6144 characters within these strings retain their usual meaning.
6146 If you do not define this macro, the characters @samp{@{}, @samp{|} and
6147 @samp{@}} do not have any special meaning when used in templates or
6148 operands to @code{asm_fprintf}.
6150 Define the macros @code{REGISTER_PREFIX}, @code{LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX},
6151 @code{USER_LABEL_PREFIX} and @code{IMMEDIATE_PREFIX} if you can express
6152 the variations in assembler language syntax with that mechanism. Define
6153 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} and use the @samp{@{option0|option1@}} syntax
6154 if the syntax variant are larger and involve such things as different
6155 opcodes or operand order.
6157 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_REG_PUSH
6158 @item ASM_OUTPUT_REG_PUSH (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6159 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6160 which will push hard register number @var{regno} onto the stack.
6161 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6164 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_REG_POP
6165 @item ASM_OUTPUT_REG_POP (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6166 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6167 which will pop hard register number @var{regno} off of the stack.
6168 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6172 @node Dispatch Tables
6173 @subsection Output of Dispatch Tables
6175 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6176 This concerns dispatch tables.
6179 @cindex dispatch table
6180 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT
6181 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{body}, @var{value}, @var{rel})
6182 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6183 pseudo-instruction to generate a difference between two labels.
6184 @var{value} and @var{rel} are the numbers of two internal labels. The
6185 definitions of these labels are output using
6186 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}, and they must be printed in the same
6187 way here. For example,
6190 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d-L%d\n",
6191 @var{value}, @var{rel})
6194 You must provide this macro on machines where the addresses in a
6195 dispatch table are relative to the table's own address. If defined, GNU
6196 CC will also use this macro on all machines when producing PIC.
6197 @var{body} is the body of the ADDR_DIFF_VEC; it is provided so that the
6198 mode and flags can be read.
6200 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT
6201 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
6202 This macro should be provided on machines where the addresses
6203 in a dispatch table are absolute.
6205 The definition should be a C statement to output to the stdio stream
6206 @var{stream} an assembler pseudo-instruction to generate a reference to
6207 a label. @var{value} is the number of an internal label whose
6208 definition is output using @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}.
6212 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d\n", @var{value})
6215 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL
6216 @item ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6217 Define this if the label before a jump-table needs to be output
6218 specially. The first three arguments are the same as for
6219 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}; the fourth argument is the
6220 jump-table which follows (a @code{jump_insn} containing an
6221 @code{addr_vec} or @code{addr_diff_vec}).
6223 This feature is used on system V to output a @code{swbeg} statement
6226 If this macro is not defined, these labels are output with
6227 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}.
6229 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_END
6230 @item ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_END (@var{stream}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6231 Define this if something special must be output at the end of a
6232 jump-table. The definition should be a C statement to be executed
6233 after the assembler code for the table is written. It should write
6234 the appropriate code to stdio stream @var{stream}. The argument
6235 @var{table} is the jump-table insn, and @var{num} is the label-number
6236 of the preceding label.
6238 If this macro is not defined, nothing special is output at the end of
6242 @node Exception Region Output
6243 @subsection Assembler Commands for Exception Regions
6245 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6247 This describes commands marking the start and the end of an exception
6251 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_EH_REGION_BEG
6252 @item ASM_OUTPUT_EH_REGION_BEG ()
6253 A C expression to output text to mark the start of an exception region.
6255 This macro need not be defined on most platforms.
6257 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_EH_REGION_END
6258 @item ASM_OUTPUT_EH_REGION_END ()
6259 A C expression to output text to mark the end of an exception region.
6261 This macro need not be defined on most platforms.
6263 @findex EXCEPTION_SECTION
6264 @item EXCEPTION_SECTION ()
6265 A C expression to switch to the section in which the main
6266 exception table is to be placed (@pxref{Sections}). The default is a
6267 section named @code{.gcc_except_table} on machines that support named
6268 sections via @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SECTION_NAME}, otherwise if @samp{-fpic}
6269 or @samp{-fPIC} is in effect, the @code{data_section}, otherwise the
6270 @code{readonly_data_section}.
6272 @findex EH_FRAME_SECTION_ASM_OP
6273 @item EH_FRAME_SECTION_ASM_OP
6274 If defined, a C string constant for the assembler operation to switch to
6275 the section for exception handling frame unwind information. If not
6276 defined, GNU CC will provide a default definition if the target supports
6277 named sections. @file{crtstuff.c} uses this macro to switch to the
6278 appropriate section.
6280 You should define this symbol if your target supports DWARF 2 frame
6281 unwind information and the default definition does not work.
6283 @findex OMIT_EH_TABLE
6284 @item OMIT_EH_TABLE ()
6285 A C expression that is nonzero if the normal exception table output
6288 This macro need not be defined on most platforms.
6290 @findex EH_TABLE_LOOKUP
6291 @item EH_TABLE_LOOKUP ()
6292 Alternate runtime support for looking up an exception at runtime and
6293 finding the associated handler, if the default method won't work.
6295 This macro need not be defined on most platforms.
6297 @findex DOESNT_NEED_UNWINDER
6298 @item DOESNT_NEED_UNWINDER
6299 A C expression that decides whether or not the current function needs to
6300 have a function unwinder generated for it. See the file @code{except.c}
6301 for details on when to define this, and how.
6303 @findex MASK_RETURN_ADDR
6304 @item MASK_RETURN_ADDR
6305 An rtx used to mask the return address found via RETURN_ADDR_RTX, so
6306 that it does not contain any extraneous set bits in it.
6308 @findex DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO
6309 @item DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO
6310 Define this macro to 0 if your target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
6311 information, but it does not yet work with exception handling.
6312 Otherwise, if your target supports this information (if it defines
6313 @samp{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and either @samp{UNALIGNED_INT_ASM_OP}
6314 or @samp{OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF}), GCC will provide a default definition of
6317 If this macro is defined to 1, the DWARF 2 unwinder will be the default
6318 exception handling mechanism; otherwise, setjmp/longjmp will be used by
6321 If this macro is defined to anything, the DWARF 2 unwinder will be used
6322 instead of inline unwinders and __unwind_function in the non-setjmp case.
6326 @node Alignment Output
6327 @subsection Assembler Commands for Alignment
6329 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6330 This describes commands for alignment.
6333 @findex LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER
6334 @item LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER (@var{label})
6335 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which follows
6338 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6339 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6343 @item LOOP_ALIGN (@var{label})
6344 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which follows
6345 a NOTE_INSN_LOOP_BEG note.
6347 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6348 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6352 @item LABEL_ALIGN (@var{label})
6353 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}.
6354 If LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER / LOOP_ALIGN specify a different alignment,
6355 the maximum of the specified values is used.
6357 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP
6358 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP (@var{stream}, @var{nbytes})
6359 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6360 instruction to advance the location counter by @var{nbytes} bytes.
6361 Those bytes should be zero when loaded. @var{nbytes} will be a C
6362 expression of type @code{int}.
6364 @findex ASM_NO_SKIP_IN_TEXT
6365 @item ASM_NO_SKIP_IN_TEXT
6366 Define this macro if @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP} should not be used in the
6367 text section because it fails to put zeros in the bytes that are skipped.
6368 This is true on many Unix systems, where the pseudo--op to skip bytes
6369 produces no-op instructions rather than zeros when used in the text
6372 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN
6373 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power})
6374 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6375 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6376 @var{power} bytes. @var{power} will be a C expression of type @code{int}.
6380 @node Debugging Info
6381 @section Controlling Debugging Information Format
6383 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6384 This describes how to specify debugging information.
6387 * All Debuggers:: Macros that affect all debugging formats uniformly.
6388 * DBX Options:: Macros enabling specific options in DBX format.
6389 * DBX Hooks:: Hook macros for varying DBX format.
6390 * File Names and DBX:: Macros controlling output of file names in DBX format.
6391 * SDB and DWARF:: Macros for SDB (COFF) and DWARF formats.
6395 @subsection Macros Affecting All Debugging Formats
6397 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6398 These macros affect all debugging formats.
6401 @findex DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER
6402 @item DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER (@var{regno})
6403 A C expression that returns the DBX register number for the compiler
6404 register number @var{regno}. In simple cases, the value of this
6405 expression may be @var{regno} itself. But sometimes there are some
6406 registers that the compiler knows about and DBX does not, or vice
6407 versa. In such cases, some register may need to have one number in
6408 the compiler and another for DBX.
6410 If two registers have consecutive numbers inside GNU CC, and they can be
6411 used as a pair to hold a multiword value, then they @emph{must} have
6412 consecutive numbers after renumbering with @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER}.
6413 Otherwise, debuggers will be unable to access such a pair, because they
6414 expect register pairs to be consecutive in their own numbering scheme.
6416 If you find yourself defining @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER} in way that
6417 does not preserve register pairs, then what you must do instead is
6418 redefine the actual register numbering scheme.
6420 @findex DEBUGGER_AUTO_OFFSET
6421 @item DEBUGGER_AUTO_OFFSET (@var{x})
6422 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an automatic
6423 variable having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The default
6424 computation assumes that @var{x} is based on the frame-pointer and
6425 gives the offset from the frame-pointer. This is required for targets
6426 that produce debugging output for DBX or COFF-style debugging output
6427 for SDB and allow the frame-pointer to be eliminated when the
6428 @samp{-g} options is used.
6430 @findex DEBUGGER_ARG_OFFSET
6431 @item DEBUGGER_ARG_OFFSET (@var{offset}, @var{x})
6432 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an argument
6433 having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The nominal offset is
6436 @findex PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE
6437 @item PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE
6438 A C expression that returns the type of debugging output GNU CC should
6439 produce when the user specifies just @samp{-g}. Define
6440 this if you have arranged for GNU CC to support more than one format of
6441 debugging output. Currently, the allowable values are @code{DBX_DEBUG},
6442 @code{SDB_DEBUG}, @code{DWARF_DEBUG}, @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}, and
6445 When the user specifies @samp{-ggdb}, GNU CC normally also uses the
6446 value of this macro to select the debugging output format, but with two
6447 exceptions. If @code{DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO} is defined and
6448 @code{LINKER_DOES_NOT_WORK_WITH_DWARF2} is not defined, GNU CC uses the
6449 value @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}. Otherwise, if @code{DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO} is
6450 defined, GNU CC uses @code{DBX_DEBUG}.
6452 The value of this macro only affects the default debugging output; the
6453 user can always get a specific type of output by using @samp{-gstabs},
6454 @samp{-gcoff}, @samp{-gdwarf-1}, @samp{-gdwarf-2}, or @samp{-gxcoff}.
6458 @subsection Specific Options for DBX Output
6460 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6461 These are specific options for DBX output.
6464 @findex DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO
6465 @item DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO
6466 Define this macro if GNU CC should produce debugging output for DBX
6467 in response to the @samp{-g} option.
6469 @findex XCOFF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6470 @item XCOFF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6471 Define this macro if GNU CC should produce XCOFF format debugging output
6472 in response to the @samp{-g} option. This is a variant of DBX format.
6474 @findex DEFAULT_GDB_EXTENSIONS
6475 @item DEFAULT_GDB_EXTENSIONS
6476 Define this macro to control whether GNU CC should by default generate
6477 GDB's extended version of DBX debugging information (assuming DBX-format
6478 debugging information is enabled at all). If you don't define the
6479 macro, the default is 1: always generate the extended information
6480 if there is any occasion to.
6482 @findex DEBUG_SYMS_TEXT
6483 @item DEBUG_SYMS_TEXT
6484 Define this macro if all @code{.stabs} commands should be output while
6485 in the text section.
6487 @findex ASM_STABS_OP
6489 A C string constant naming the assembler pseudo op to use instead of
6490 @code{.stabs} to define an ordinary debugging symbol. If you don't
6491 define this macro, @code{.stabs} is used. This macro applies only to
6492 DBX debugging information format.
6494 @findex ASM_STABD_OP
6496 A C string constant naming the assembler pseudo op to use instead of
6497 @code{.stabd} to define a debugging symbol whose value is the current
6498 location. If you don't define this macro, @code{.stabd} is used.
6499 This macro applies only to DBX debugging information format.
6501 @findex ASM_STABN_OP
6503 A C string constant naming the assembler pseudo op to use instead of
6504 @code{.stabn} to define a debugging symbol with no name. If you don't
6505 define this macro, @code{.stabn} is used. This macro applies only to
6506 DBX debugging information format.
6508 @findex DBX_NO_XREFS
6510 Define this macro if DBX on your system does not support the construct
6511 @samp{xs@var{tagname}}. On some systems, this construct is used to
6512 describe a forward reference to a structure named @var{tagname}.
6513 On other systems, this construct is not supported at all.
6515 @findex DBX_CONTIN_LENGTH
6516 @item DBX_CONTIN_LENGTH
6517 A symbol name in DBX-format debugging information is normally
6518 continued (split into two separate @code{.stabs} directives) when it
6519 exceeds a certain length (by default, 80 characters). On some
6520 operating systems, DBX requires this splitting; on others, splitting
6521 must not be done. You can inhibit splitting by defining this macro
6522 with the value zero. You can override the default splitting-length by
6523 defining this macro as an expression for the length you desire.
6525 @findex DBX_CONTIN_CHAR
6526 @item DBX_CONTIN_CHAR
6527 Normally continuation is indicated by adding a @samp{\} character to
6528 the end of a @code{.stabs} string when a continuation follows. To use
6529 a different character instead, define this macro as a character
6530 constant for the character you want to use. Do not define this macro
6531 if backslash is correct for your system.
6533 @findex DBX_STATIC_STAB_DATA_SECTION
6534 @item DBX_STATIC_STAB_DATA_SECTION
6535 Define this macro if it is necessary to go to the data section before
6536 outputting the @samp{.stabs} pseudo-op for a non-global static
6539 @findex DBX_TYPE_DECL_STABS_CODE
6540 @item DBX_TYPE_DECL_STABS_CODE
6541 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6542 for a typedef. The default is @code{N_LSYM}.
6544 @findex DBX_STATIC_CONST_VAR_CODE
6545 @item DBX_STATIC_CONST_VAR_CODE
6546 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6547 for a static variable located in the text section. DBX format does not
6548 provide any ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_FUN}.
6550 @findex DBX_REGPARM_STABS_CODE
6551 @item DBX_REGPARM_STABS_CODE
6552 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6553 for a parameter passed in registers. DBX format does not provide any
6554 ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_RSYM}.
6556 @findex DBX_REGPARM_STABS_LETTER
6557 @item DBX_REGPARM_STABS_LETTER
6558 The letter to use in DBX symbol data to identify a symbol as a parameter
6559 passed in registers. DBX format does not customarily provide any way to
6560 do this. The default is @code{'P'}.
6562 @findex DBX_MEMPARM_STABS_LETTER
6563 @item DBX_MEMPARM_STABS_LETTER
6564 The letter to use in DBX symbol data to identify a symbol as a stack
6565 parameter. The default is @code{'p'}.
6567 @findex DBX_FUNCTION_FIRST
6568 @item DBX_FUNCTION_FIRST
6569 Define this macro if the DBX information for a function and its
6570 arguments should precede the assembler code for the function. Normally,
6571 in DBX format, the debugging information entirely follows the assembler
6574 @findex DBX_LBRAC_FIRST
6575 @item DBX_LBRAC_FIRST
6576 Define this macro if the @code{N_LBRAC} symbol for a block should
6577 precede the debugging information for variables and functions defined in
6578 that block. Normally, in DBX format, the @code{N_LBRAC} symbol comes
6581 @findex DBX_BLOCKS_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6582 @item DBX_BLOCKS_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6583 Define this macro if the value of a symbol describing the scope of a
6584 block (@code{N_LBRAC} or @code{N_RBRAC}) should be relative to the start
6585 of the enclosing function. Normally, GNU C uses an absolute address.
6587 @findex DBX_USE_BINCL
6589 Define this macro if GNU C should generate @code{N_BINCL} and
6590 @code{N_EINCL} stabs for included header files, as on Sun systems. This
6591 macro also directs GNU C to output a type number as a pair of a file
6592 number and a type number within the file. Normally, GNU C does not
6593 generate @code{N_BINCL} or @code{N_EINCL} stabs, and it outputs a single
6594 number for a type number.
6598 @subsection Open-Ended Hooks for DBX Format
6600 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6601 These are hooks for DBX format.
6604 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_LBRAC
6605 @item DBX_OUTPUT_LBRAC (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6606 Define this macro to say how to output to @var{stream} the debugging
6607 information for the start of a scope level for variable names. The
6608 argument @var{name} is the name of an assembler symbol (for use with
6609 @code{assemble_name}) whose value is the address where the scope begins.
6611 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_RBRAC
6612 @item DBX_OUTPUT_RBRAC (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6613 Like @code{DBX_OUTPUT_LBRAC}, but for the end of a scope level.
6615 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_ENUM
6616 @item DBX_OUTPUT_ENUM (@var{stream}, @var{type})
6617 Define this macro if the target machine requires special handling to
6618 output an enumeration type. The definition should be a C statement
6619 (sans semicolon) to output the appropriate information to @var{stream}
6620 for the type @var{type}.
6622 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_END
6623 @item DBX_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_END (@var{stream}, @var{function})
6624 Define this macro if the target machine requires special output at the
6625 end of the debugging information for a function. The definition should
6626 be a C statement (sans semicolon) to output the appropriate information
6627 to @var{stream}. @var{function} is the @code{FUNCTION_DECL} node for
6630 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_STANDARD_TYPES
6631 @item DBX_OUTPUT_STANDARD_TYPES (@var{syms})
6632 Define this macro if you need to control the order of output of the
6633 standard data types at the beginning of compilation. The argument
6634 @var{syms} is a @code{tree} which is a chain of all the predefined
6635 global symbols, including names of data types.
6637 Normally, DBX output starts with definitions of the types for integers
6638 and characters, followed by all the other predefined types of the
6639 particular language in no particular order.
6641 On some machines, it is necessary to output different particular types
6642 first. To do this, define @code{DBX_OUTPUT_STANDARD_TYPES} to output
6643 those symbols in the necessary order. Any predefined types that you
6644 don't explicitly output will be output afterward in no particular order.
6646 Be careful not to define this macro so that it works only for C. There
6647 are no global variables to access most of the built-in types, because
6648 another language may have another set of types. The way to output a
6649 particular type is to look through @var{syms} to see if you can find it.
6655 for (decl = syms; decl; decl = TREE_CHAIN (decl))
6656 if (!strcmp (IDENTIFIER_POINTER (DECL_NAME (decl)),
6658 dbxout_symbol (decl);
6664 This does nothing if the expected type does not exist.
6666 See the function @code{init_decl_processing} in @file{c-decl.c} to find
6667 the names to use for all the built-in C types.
6669 Here is another way of finding a particular type:
6671 @c this is still overfull. --mew 10feb93
6675 for (decl = syms; decl; decl = TREE_CHAIN (decl))
6676 if (TREE_CODE (decl) == TYPE_DECL
6677 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (decl))
6679 && TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (decl)) == 16
6680 && TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (decl)))
6682 /* @r{This must be @code{unsigned short}.} */
6683 dbxout_symbol (decl);
6689 @findex NO_DBX_FUNCTION_END
6690 @item NO_DBX_FUNCTION_END
6691 Some stabs encapsulation formats (in particular ECOFF), cannot handle the
6692 @code{.stabs "",N_FUN,,0,0,Lscope-function-1} gdb dbx extention construct.
6693 On those machines, define this macro to turn this feature off without
6694 disturbing the rest of the gdb extensions.
6698 @node File Names and DBX
6699 @subsection File Names in DBX Format
6701 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6702 This describes file names in DBX format.
6705 @findex DBX_WORKING_DIRECTORY
6706 @item DBX_WORKING_DIRECTORY
6707 Define this if DBX wants to have the current directory recorded in each
6710 Note that the working directory is always recorded if GDB extensions are
6713 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILENAME
6714 @item DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6715 A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
6716 @var{stream} which indicates that file @var{name} is the main source
6717 file---the file specified as the input file for compilation.
6718 This macro is called only once, at the beginning of compilation.
6720 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
6721 for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
6723 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_DIRECTORY
6724 @item DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_DIRECTORY (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6725 A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
6726 @var{stream} which indicates that the current directory during
6727 compilation is named @var{name}.
6729 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
6730 for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
6732 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END
6733 @item DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6734 A C statement to output DBX debugging information at the end of
6735 compilation of the main source file @var{name}.
6737 If you don't define this macro, nothing special is output at the end
6738 of compilation, which is correct for most machines.
6740 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME
6741 @item DBX_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6742 A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
6743 @var{stream} which indicates that file @var{name} is the current source
6744 file. This output is generated each time input shifts to a different
6745 source file as a result of @samp{#include}, the end of an included file,
6746 or a @samp{#line} command.
6748 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
6749 for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
6754 @subsection Macros for SDB and DWARF Output
6756 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6757 Here are macros for SDB and DWARF output.
6760 @findex SDB_DEBUGGING_INFO
6761 @item SDB_DEBUGGING_INFO
6762 Define this macro if GNU CC should produce COFF-style debugging output
6763 for SDB in response to the @samp{-g} option.
6765 @findex DWARF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6766 @item DWARF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6767 Define this macro if GNU CC should produce dwarf format debugging output
6768 in response to the @samp{-g} option.
6770 @findex DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO
6771 @item DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO
6772 Define this macro if GNU CC should produce dwarf version 2 format
6773 debugging output in response to the @samp{-g} option.
6775 To support optional call frame debugging information, you must also
6776 define @code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and either set
6777 @code{RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P} on the prologue insns if you use RTL for the
6778 prologue, or call @code{dwarf2out_def_cfa} and @code{dwarf2out_reg_save}
6779 as appropriate from @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} if you don't.
6781 @findex DWARF2_FRAME_INFO
6782 @item DWARF2_FRAME_INFO
6783 Define this macro to a nonzero value if GNU CC should always output
6784 Dwarf 2 frame information. If @code{DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO}
6785 (@pxref{Exception Region Output} is nonzero, GNU CC will output this
6786 information not matter how you define @code{DWARF2_FRAME_INFO}.
6788 @findex LINKER_DOES_NOT_WORK_WITH_DWARF2
6789 @item LINKER_DOES_NOT_WORK_WITH_DWARF2
6790 Define this macro if the linker does not work with Dwarf version 2.
6791 Normally, if the user specifies only @samp{-ggdb} GNU CC will use Dwarf
6792 version 2 if available; this macro disables this. See the description
6793 of the @code{PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE} macro for more details.
6795 @findex PUT_SDB_@dots{}
6796 @item PUT_SDB_@dots{}
6797 Define these macros to override the assembler syntax for the special
6798 SDB assembler directives. See @file{sdbout.c} for a list of these
6799 macros and their arguments. If the standard syntax is used, you need
6800 not define them yourself.
6804 Some assemblers do not support a semicolon as a delimiter, even between
6805 SDB assembler directives. In that case, define this macro to be the
6806 delimiter to use (usually @samp{\n}). It is not necessary to define
6807 a new set of @code{PUT_SDB_@var{op}} macros if this is the only change
6810 @findex SDB_GENERATE_FAKE
6811 @item SDB_GENERATE_FAKE
6812 Define this macro to override the usual method of constructing a dummy
6813 name for anonymous structure and union types. See @file{sdbout.c} for
6816 @findex SDB_ALLOW_UNKNOWN_REFERENCES
6817 @item SDB_ALLOW_UNKNOWN_REFERENCES
6818 Define this macro to allow references to unknown structure,
6819 union, or enumeration tags to be emitted. Standard COFF does not
6820 allow handling of unknown references, MIPS ECOFF has support for
6823 @findex SDB_ALLOW_FORWARD_REFERENCES
6824 @item SDB_ALLOW_FORWARD_REFERENCES
6825 Define this macro to allow references to structure, union, or
6826 enumeration tags that have not yet been seen to be handled. Some
6827 assemblers choke if forward tags are used, while some require it.
6830 @node Cross-compilation
6831 @section Cross Compilation and Floating Point
6832 @cindex cross compilation and floating point
6833 @cindex floating point and cross compilation
6835 While all modern machines use 2's complement representation for integers,
6836 there are a variety of representations for floating point numbers. This
6837 means that in a cross-compiler the representation of floating point numbers
6838 in the compiled program may be different from that used in the machine
6839 doing the compilation.
6842 Because different representation systems may offer different amounts of
6843 range and precision, the cross compiler cannot safely use the host
6844 machine's floating point arithmetic. Therefore, floating point constants
6845 must be represented in the target machine's format. This means that the
6846 cross compiler cannot use @code{atof} to parse a floating point constant;
6847 it must have its own special routine to use instead. Also, constant
6848 folding must emulate the target machine's arithmetic (or must not be done
6851 The macros in the following table should be defined only if you are cross
6852 compiling between different floating point formats.
6854 Otherwise, don't define them. Then default definitions will be set up which
6855 use @code{double} as the data type, @code{==} to test for equality, etc.
6857 You don't need to worry about how many times you use an operand of any
6858 of these macros. The compiler never uses operands which have side effects.
6861 @findex REAL_VALUE_TYPE
6862 @item REAL_VALUE_TYPE
6863 A macro for the C data type to be used to hold a floating point value
6864 in the target machine's format. Typically this would be a
6865 @code{struct} containing an array of @code{int}.
6867 @findex REAL_VALUES_EQUAL
6868 @item REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (@var{x}, @var{y})
6869 A macro for a C expression which compares for equality the two values,
6870 @var{x} and @var{y}, both of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
6872 @findex REAL_VALUES_LESS
6873 @item REAL_VALUES_LESS (@var{x}, @var{y})
6874 A macro for a C expression which tests whether @var{x} is less than
6875 @var{y}, both values being of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} and
6876 interpreted as floating point numbers in the target machine's
6879 @findex REAL_VALUE_LDEXP
6881 @item REAL_VALUE_LDEXP (@var{x}, @var{scale})
6882 A macro for a C expression which performs the standard library
6883 function @code{ldexp}, but using the target machine's floating point
6884 representation. Both @var{x} and the value of the expression have
6885 type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}. The second argument, @var{scale}, is an
6888 @findex REAL_VALUE_FIX
6889 @item REAL_VALUE_FIX (@var{x})
6890 A macro whose definition is a C expression to convert the target-machine
6891 floating point value @var{x} to a signed integer. @var{x} has type
6892 @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
6894 @findex REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX
6895 @item REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX (@var{x})
6896 A macro whose definition is a C expression to convert the target-machine
6897 floating point value @var{x} to an unsigned integer. @var{x} has type
6898 @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
6900 @findex REAL_VALUE_RNDZINT
6901 @item REAL_VALUE_RNDZINT (@var{x})
6902 A macro whose definition is a C expression to round the target-machine
6903 floating point value @var{x} towards zero to an integer value (but still
6904 as a floating point number). @var{x} has type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE},
6905 and so does the value.
6907 @findex REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_RNDZINT
6908 @item REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_RNDZINT (@var{x})
6909 A macro whose definition is a C expression to round the target-machine
6910 floating point value @var{x} towards zero to an unsigned integer value
6911 (but still represented as a floating point number). @var{x} has type
6912 @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, and so does the value.
6914 @findex REAL_VALUE_ATOF
6915 @item REAL_VALUE_ATOF (@var{string}, @var{mode})
6916 A macro for a C expression which converts @var{string}, an expression of
6917 type @code{char *}, into a floating point number in the target machine's
6918 representation for mode @var{mode}. The value has type
6919 @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
6921 @findex REAL_INFINITY
6923 Define this macro if infinity is a possible floating point value, and
6924 therefore division by 0 is legitimate.
6926 @findex REAL_VALUE_ISINF
6928 @item REAL_VALUE_ISINF (@var{x})
6929 A macro for a C expression which determines whether @var{x}, a floating
6930 point value, is infinity. The value has type @code{int}.
6931 By default, this is defined to call @code{isinf}.
6933 @findex REAL_VALUE_ISNAN
6935 @item REAL_VALUE_ISNAN (@var{x})
6936 A macro for a C expression which determines whether @var{x}, a floating
6937 point value, is a ``nan'' (not-a-number). The value has type
6938 @code{int}. By default, this is defined to call @code{isnan}.
6941 @cindex constant folding and floating point
6942 Define the following additional macros if you want to make floating
6943 point constant folding work while cross compiling. If you don't
6944 define them, cross compilation is still possible, but constant folding
6945 will not happen for floating point values.
6948 @findex REAL_ARITHMETIC
6949 @item REAL_ARITHMETIC (@var{output}, @var{code}, @var{x}, @var{y})
6950 A macro for a C statement which calculates an arithmetic operation of
6951 the two floating point values @var{x} and @var{y}, both of type
6952 @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} in the target machine's representation, to
6953 produce a result of the same type and representation which is stored
6954 in @var{output} (which will be a variable).
6956 The operation to be performed is specified by @var{code}, a tree code
6957 which will always be one of the following: @code{PLUS_EXPR},
6958 @code{MINUS_EXPR}, @code{MULT_EXPR}, @code{RDIV_EXPR},
6959 @code{MAX_EXPR}, @code{MIN_EXPR}.@refill
6961 @cindex overflow while constant folding
6962 The expansion of this macro is responsible for checking for overflow.
6963 If overflow happens, the macro expansion should execute the statement
6964 @code{return 0;}, which indicates the inability to perform the
6965 arithmetic operation requested.
6967 @findex REAL_VALUE_NEGATE
6968 @item REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (@var{x})
6969 A macro for a C expression which returns the negative of the floating
6970 point value @var{x}. Both @var{x} and the value of the expression
6971 have type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} and are in the target machine's
6972 floating point representation.
6974 There is no way for this macro to report overflow, since overflow
6975 can't happen in the negation operation.
6977 @findex REAL_VALUE_TRUNCATE
6978 @item REAL_VALUE_TRUNCATE (@var{mode}, @var{x})
6979 A macro for a C expression which converts the floating point value
6980 @var{x} to mode @var{mode}.
6982 Both @var{x} and the value of the expression are in the target machine's
6983 floating point representation and have type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
6984 However, the value should have an appropriate bit pattern to be output
6985 properly as a floating constant whose precision accords with mode
6988 There is no way for this macro to report overflow.
6990 @findex REAL_VALUE_TO_INT
6991 @item REAL_VALUE_TO_INT (@var{low}, @var{high}, @var{x})
6992 A macro for a C expression which converts a floating point value
6993 @var{x} into a double-precision integer which is then stored into
6994 @var{low} and @var{high}, two variables of type @var{int}.
6996 @item REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT (@var{x}, @var{low}, @var{high}, @var{mode})
6997 @findex REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT
6998 A macro for a C expression which converts a double-precision integer
6999 found in @var{low} and @var{high}, two variables of type @var{int},
7000 into a floating point value which is then stored into @var{x}.
7001 The value is in the target machine's representation for mode @var{mode}
7002 and has the type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
7006 @section Miscellaneous Parameters
7007 @cindex parameters, miscellaneous
7009 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7010 Here are several miscellaneous parameters.
7013 @item PREDICATE_CODES
7014 @findex PREDICATE_CODES
7015 Define this if you have defined special-purpose predicates in the file
7016 @file{@var{machine}.c}. This macro is called within an initializer of an
7017 array of structures. The first field in the structure is the name of a
7018 predicate and the second field is an array of rtl codes. For each
7019 predicate, list all rtl codes that can be in expressions matched by the
7020 predicate. The list should have a trailing comma. Here is an example
7021 of two entries in the list for a typical RISC machine:
7024 #define PREDICATE_CODES \
7025 @{"gen_reg_rtx_operand", @{SUBREG, REG@}@}, \
7026 @{"reg_or_short_cint_operand", @{SUBREG, REG, CONST_INT@}@},
7029 Defining this macro does not affect the generated code (however,
7030 incorrect definitions that omit an rtl code that may be matched by the
7031 predicate can cause the compiler to malfunction). Instead, it allows
7032 the table built by @file{genrecog} to be more compact and efficient,
7033 thus speeding up the compiler. The most important predicates to include
7034 in the list specified by this macro are those used in the most insn
7037 @findex CASE_VECTOR_MODE
7038 @item CASE_VECTOR_MODE
7039 An alias for a machine mode name. This is the machine mode that
7040 elements of a jump-table should have.
7042 @findex CASE_VECTOR_SHORTEN_MODE
7043 @item CASE_VECTOR_SHORTEN_MODE (@var{min_offset}, @var{max_offset}, @var{body})
7044 Optional: return the preferred mode for an @code{addr_diff_vec}
7045 when the minimum and maximum offset are known. If you define this,
7046 it enables extra code in branch shortening to deal with @code{addr_diff_vec}.
7047 To make this work, you also have to define INSN_ALIGN and
7048 make the alignment for @code{addr_diff_vec} explicit.
7049 The @var{body} argument is provided so that the offset_unsigned and scale
7050 flags can be updated.
7052 @findex CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
7053 @item CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
7054 Define this macro to be a C expression to indicate when jump-tables
7055 should contain relative addresses. If jump-tables never contain
7056 relative addresses, then you need not define this macro.
7058 @findex CASE_DROPS_THROUGH
7059 @item CASE_DROPS_THROUGH
7060 Define this if control falls through a @code{case} insn when the index
7061 value is out of range. This means the specified default-label is
7062 actually ignored by the @code{case} insn proper.
7064 @findex CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD
7065 @item CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD
7066 Define this to be the smallest number of different values for which it
7067 is best to use a jump-table instead of a tree of conditional branches.
7068 The default is four for machines with a @code{casesi} instruction and
7069 five otherwise. This is best for most machines.
7071 @findex WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
7072 @item WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
7073 Define this macro if operations between registers with integral mode
7074 smaller than a word are always performed on the entire register.
7075 Most RISC machines have this property and most CISC machines do not.
7077 @findex LOAD_EXTEND_OP
7078 @item LOAD_EXTEND_OP (@var{mode})
7079 Define this macro to be a C expression indicating when insns that read
7080 memory in @var{mode}, an integral mode narrower than a word, set the
7081 bits outside of @var{mode} to be either the sign-extension or the
7082 zero-extension of the data read. Return @code{SIGN_EXTEND} for values
7083 of @var{mode} for which the
7084 insn sign-extends, @code{ZERO_EXTEND} for which it zero-extends, and
7085 @code{NIL} for other modes.
7087 This macro is not called with @var{mode} non-integral or with a width
7088 greater than or equal to @code{BITS_PER_WORD}, so you may return any
7089 value in this case. Do not define this macro if it would always return
7090 @code{NIL}. On machines where this macro is defined, you will normally
7091 define it as the constant @code{SIGN_EXTEND} or @code{ZERO_EXTEND}.
7093 @findex SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
7094 @item SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
7095 Define this macro if loading short immediate values into registers sign
7098 @findex IMPLICIT_FIX_EXPR
7099 @item IMPLICIT_FIX_EXPR
7100 An alias for a tree code that should be used by default for conversion
7101 of floating point values to fixed point. Normally,
7102 @code{FIX_ROUND_EXPR} is used.@refill
7104 @findex FIXUNS_TRUNC_LIKE_FIX_TRUNC
7105 @item FIXUNS_TRUNC_LIKE_FIX_TRUNC
7106 Define this macro if the same instructions that convert a floating
7107 point number to a signed fixed point number also convert validly to an
7110 @findex EASY_DIV_EXPR
7112 An alias for a tree code that is the easiest kind of division to
7113 compile code for in the general case. It may be
7114 @code{TRUNC_DIV_EXPR}, @code{FLOOR_DIV_EXPR}, @code{CEIL_DIV_EXPR} or
7115 @code{ROUND_DIV_EXPR}. These four division operators differ in how
7116 they round the result to an integer. @code{EASY_DIV_EXPR} is used
7117 when it is permissible to use any of those kinds of division and the
7118 choice should be made on the basis of efficiency.@refill
7122 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7123 between memory and registers or between two memory locations.
7125 @findex MAX_MOVE_MAX
7127 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7128 between memory and registers or between two memory locations. If this
7129 is undefined, the default is @code{MOVE_MAX}. Otherwise, it is the
7130 constant value that is the largest value that @code{MOVE_MAX} can have
7133 @findex SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
7134 @item SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
7135 A C expression that is nonzero if on this machine the number of bits
7136 actually used for the count of a shift operation is equal to the number
7137 of bits needed to represent the size of the object being shifted. When
7138 this macro is non-zero, the compiler will assume that it is safe to omit
7139 a sign-extend, zero-extend, and certain bitwise `and' instructions that
7140 truncates the count of a shift operation. On machines that have
7141 instructions that act on bitfields at variable positions, which may
7142 include `bit test' instructions, a nonzero @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED}
7143 also enables deletion of truncations of the values that serve as
7144 arguments to bitfield instructions.
7146 If both types of instructions truncate the count (for shifts) and
7147 position (for bitfield operations), or if no variable-position bitfield
7148 instructions exist, you should define this macro.
7150 However, on some machines, such as the 80386 and the 680x0, truncation
7151 only applies to shift operations and not the (real or pretended)
7152 bitfield operations. Define @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED} to be zero on
7153 such machines. Instead, add patterns to the @file{md} file that include
7154 the implied truncation of the shift instructions.
7156 You need not define this macro if it would always have the value of zero.
7158 @findex TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION
7159 @item TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION (@var{outprec}, @var{inprec})
7160 A C expression which is nonzero if on this machine it is safe to
7161 ``convert'' an integer of @var{inprec} bits to one of @var{outprec}
7162 bits (where @var{outprec} is smaller than @var{inprec}) by merely
7163 operating on it as if it had only @var{outprec} bits.
7165 On many machines, this expression can be 1.
7167 @c rearranged this, removed the phrase "it is reported that". this was
7168 @c to fix an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
7169 When @code{TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION} returns 1 for a pair of sizes for
7170 modes for which @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P} is 0, suboptimal code can result.
7171 If this is the case, making @code{TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION} return 0 in
7172 such cases may improve things.
7174 @findex STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7175 @item STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7176 A C expression describing the value returned by a comparison operator
7177 with an integral mode and stored by a store-flag instruction
7178 (@samp{s@var{cond}}) when the condition is true. This description must
7179 apply to @emph{all} the @samp{s@var{cond}} patterns and all the
7180 comparison operators whose results have a @code{MODE_INT} mode.
7182 A value of 1 or -1 means that the instruction implementing the
7183 comparison operator returns exactly 1 or -1 when the comparison is true
7184 and 0 when the comparison is false. Otherwise, the value indicates
7185 which bits of the result are guaranteed to be 1 when the comparison is
7186 true. This value is interpreted in the mode of the comparison
7187 operation, which is given by the mode of the first operand in the
7188 @samp{s@var{cond}} pattern. Either the low bit or the sign bit of
7189 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} be on. Presently, only those bits are used by
7192 If @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is neither 1 or -1, the compiler will
7193 generate code that depends only on the specified bits. It can also
7194 replace comparison operators with equivalent operations if they cause
7195 the required bits to be set, even if the remaining bits are undefined.
7196 For example, on a machine whose comparison operators return an
7197 @code{SImode} value and where @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is defined as
7198 @samp{0x80000000}, saying that just the sign bit is relevant, the
7202 (ne:SI (and:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{power-of-2})) (const_int 0))
7209 (ashift:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{n}))
7213 where @var{n} is the appropriate shift count to move the bit being
7214 tested into the sign bit.
7216 There is no way to describe a machine that always sets the low-order bit
7217 for a true value, but does not guarantee the value of any other bits,
7218 but we do not know of any machine that has such an instruction. If you
7219 are trying to port GNU CC to such a machine, include an instruction to
7220 perform a logical-and of the result with 1 in the pattern for the
7221 comparison operators and let us know
7223 (@pxref{Bug Reporting,,How to Report Bugs}).
7226 (@pxref{Bug Reporting,,How to Report Bugs,gcc.info,Using GCC}).
7229 Often, a machine will have multiple instructions that obtain a value
7230 from a comparison (or the condition codes). Here are rules to guide the
7231 choice of value for @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}, and hence the instructions
7236 Use the shortest sequence that yields a valid definition for
7237 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}. It is more efficient for the compiler to
7238 ``normalize'' the value (convert it to, e.g., 1 or 0) than for the
7239 comparison operators to do so because there may be opportunities to
7240 combine the normalization with other operations.
7243 For equal-length sequences, use a value of 1 or -1, with -1 being
7244 slightly preferred on machines with expensive jumps and 1 preferred on
7248 As a second choice, choose a value of @samp{0x80000001} if instructions
7249 exist that set both the sign and low-order bits but do not define the
7253 Otherwise, use a value of @samp{0x80000000}.
7256 Many machines can produce both the value chosen for
7257 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} and its negation in the same number of
7258 instructions. On those machines, you should also define a pattern for
7259 those cases, e.g., one matching
7262 (set @var{A} (neg:@var{m} (ne:@var{m} @var{B} @var{C})))
7265 Some machines can also perform @code{and} or @code{plus} operations on
7266 condition code values with less instructions than the corresponding
7267 @samp{s@var{cond}} insn followed by @code{and} or @code{plus}. On those
7268 machines, define the appropriate patterns. Use the names @code{incscc}
7269 and @code{decscc}, respectively, for the patterns which perform
7270 @code{plus} or @code{minus} operations on condition code values. See
7271 @file{rs6000.md} for some examples. The GNU Superoptizer can be used to
7272 find such instruction sequences on other machines.
7274 You need not define @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} if the machine has no store-flag
7277 @findex FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7278 @item FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7279 A C expression that gives a non-zero floating point value that is
7280 returned when comparison operators with floating-point results are true.
7281 Define this macro on machine that have comparison operations that return
7282 floating-point values. If there are no such operations, do not define
7287 An alias for the machine mode for pointers. On most machines, define
7288 this to be the integer mode corresponding to the width of a hardware
7289 pointer; @code{SImode} on 32-bit machine or @code{DImode} on 64-bit machines.
7290 On some machines you must define this to be one of the partial integer
7291 modes, such as @code{PSImode}.
7293 The width of @code{Pmode} must be at least as large as the value of
7294 @code{POINTER_SIZE}. If it is not equal, you must define the macro
7295 @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED} to specify how pointers are extended
7298 @findex FUNCTION_MODE
7300 An alias for the machine mode used for memory references to functions
7301 being called, in @code{call} RTL expressions. On most machines this
7302 should be @code{QImode}.
7304 @findex INTEGRATE_THRESHOLD
7305 @item INTEGRATE_THRESHOLD (@var{decl})
7306 A C expression for the maximum number of instructions above which the
7307 function @var{decl} should not be inlined. @var{decl} is a
7308 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} node.
7310 The default definition of this macro is 64 plus 8 times the number of
7311 arguments that the function accepts. Some people think a larger
7312 threshold should be used on RISC machines.
7314 @findex SCCS_DIRECTIVE
7315 @item SCCS_DIRECTIVE
7316 Define this if the preprocessor should ignore @code{#sccs} directives
7317 and print no error message.
7319 @findex NO_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7320 @item NO_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7321 Define this macro if the system header files support C++ as well as C.
7322 This macro inhibits the usual method of using system header files in
7323 C++, which is to pretend that the file's contents are enclosed in
7324 @samp{extern "C" @{@dots{}@}}.
7326 @findex HANDLE_PRAGMA
7329 @item HANDLE_PRAGMA (@var{getc}, @var{ungetc}, @var{node})
7330 Define this macro if you want to implement any pragmas. If defined, it
7331 is a C expression whose value is 1 if the pragma was handled by the
7332 function, zero otherwise. The argument @var{getc} is a function of type
7333 @samp{int (*)(void)} which will return the next character in the input
7334 stream, or EOF if no characters are left. The argument @var{ungetc} is
7335 a function of type @samp{void (*)(int)} which will push a character back
7336 into the input stream. The argument @var{name} is the word following
7337 #pragma in the input stream. The input stream pointer will be pointing
7338 just beyond the end of this word. The input stream should be left
7339 undistrubed if the expression returns zero, otherwise it should be
7340 pointing at the last character after the end of the pragma (newline or
7343 It is generally a bad idea to implement new uses of @code{#pragma}. The
7344 only reason to define this macro is for compatibility with other
7345 compilers that do support @code{#pragma} for the sake of any user
7346 programs which already use it.
7348 If the pragma can be implemented by atttributes then the macro
7349 @samp{INSERT_ATTRIBUTES} might be a useful one to define as well.
7351 Note: older versions of this macro only had two arguments: @var{stream}
7352 and @var{token}. The macro was changed in order to allow it to work
7353 when gcc is built both with and without a cpp library.
7355 @findex VALID_MACHINE_DECL_ATTRIBUTE
7356 @item VALID_MACHINE_DECL_ATTRIBUTE (@var{decl}, @var{attributes}, @var{identifier}, @var{args})
7357 If defined, a C expression whose value is nonzero if @var{identifier} with
7358 arguments @var{args} is a valid machine specific attribute for @var{decl}.
7359 The attributes in @var{attributes} have previously been assigned to @var{decl}.
7361 @findex VALID_MACHINE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTE
7362 @item VALID_MACHINE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTE (@var{type}, @var{attributes}, @var{identifier}, @var{args})
7363 If defined, a C expression whose value is nonzero if @var{identifier} with
7364 arguments @var{args} is a valid machine specific attribute for @var{type}.
7365 The attributes in @var{attributes} have previously been assigned to @var{type}.
7367 @findex COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7368 @item COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES (@var{type1}, @var{type2})
7369 If defined, a C expression whose value is zero if the attributes on
7370 @var{type1} and @var{type2} are incompatible, one if they are compatible,
7371 and two if they are nearly compatible (which causes a warning to be
7374 @findex SET_DEFAULT_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7375 @item SET_DEFAULT_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES (@var{type})
7376 If defined, a C statement that assigns default attributes to
7377 newly defined @var{type}.
7379 @findex MERGE_MACHINE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7380 @item MERGE_MACHINE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES (@var{type1}, @var{type2})
7381 Define this macro if the merging of type attributes needs special handling.
7382 If defined, the result is a list of the combined TYPE_ATTRIBUTES of
7383 @var{type1} and @var{type2}. It is assumed that comptypes has already been
7384 called and returned 1.
7386 @findex MERGE_MACHINE_DECL_ATTRIBUTES
7387 @item MERGE_MACHINE_DECL_ATTRIBUTES (@var{olddecl}, @var{newdecl})
7388 Define this macro if the merging of decl attributes needs special handling.
7389 If defined, the result is a list of the combined DECL_MACHINE_ATTRIBUTES of
7390 @var{olddecl} and @var{newdecl}. @var{newdecl} is a duplicate declaration
7391 of @var{olddecl}. Examples of when this is needed are when one attribute
7392 overrides another, or when an attribute is nullified by a subsequent
7395 @findex INSERT_ATTRIBUTES
7396 @item INSERT_ATTRIBUTES (@var{node}, @var{attr_ptr}, @var{prefix_ptr})
7397 Define this macro if you want to be able to add attributes to a decl
7398 when it is being created. This is normally useful for backends which
7399 wish to implement a pragma by using the attributes which correspond to
7400 the pragma's effect. The @var{node} argument is the decl which is being
7401 created. The @var{attr_ptr} argument is a pointer to the attribute list
7402 for this decl. The @var{prefix_ptr} is a pointer to the list of
7403 attributes that have appeared after the specifiers and modifiers of the
7404 declaration, but before the declaration proper.
7406 @findex SET_DEFAULT_DECL_ATTRIBUTES
7407 @item SET_DEFAULT_DECL_ATTRIBUTES (@var{decl}, @var{attributes})
7408 If defined, a C statement that assigns default attributes to
7409 newly defined @var{decl}.
7411 @findex SET_DEFAULT_SECTION_NAME
7412 @item SET_DEFAULT_SECTION_NAME (@var{decl})
7413 If defined, a C statement that assigns a section name to the newly
7416 @findex DOLLARS_IN_IDENTIFIERS
7417 @item DOLLARS_IN_IDENTIFIERS
7418 Define this macro to control use of the character @samp{$} in identifier
7419 names. 0 means @samp{$} is not allowed by default; 1 means it is allowed.
7420 1 is the default; there is no need to define this macro in that case.
7421 This macro controls the compiler proper; it does not affect the preprocessor.
7423 @findex NO_DOLLAR_IN_LABEL
7424 @item NO_DOLLAR_IN_LABEL
7425 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
7426 @samp{$} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in
7427 G++ have @samp{$} in the identifiers. If this macro is defined,
7428 @samp{.} is used instead.
7430 @findex NO_DOT_IN_LABEL
7431 @item NO_DOT_IN_LABEL
7432 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
7433 @samp{.} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in G++
7434 have names that use @samp{.}. If this macro is defined, these names
7435 are rewritten to avoid @samp{.}.
7437 @findex DEFAULT_MAIN_RETURN
7438 @item DEFAULT_MAIN_RETURN
7439 Define this macro if the target system expects every program's @code{main}
7440 function to return a standard ``success'' value by default (if no other
7441 value is explicitly returned).
7443 The definition should be a C statement (sans semicolon) to generate the
7444 appropriate rtl instructions. It is used only when compiling the end of
7449 Define this if the target system supports the function
7450 @code{atexit} from the ANSI C standard. If this is not defined,
7451 and @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} is not defined, a default
7452 @code{exit} function will be provided to support C++.
7456 Define this if your @code{exit} function needs to do something
7457 besides calling an external function @code{_cleanup} before
7458 terminating with @code{_exit}. The @code{EXIT_BODY} macro is
7459 only needed if neither @code{HAVE_ATEXIT} nor
7460 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} are defined.
7462 @findex INSN_SETS_ARE_DELAYED
7463 @item INSN_SETS_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7464 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7465 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7466 even if they appear to use a resource set or clobbered in @var{insn}.
7467 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}; GNU CC knows that
7468 every @code{call_insn} has this behavior. On machines where some @code{insn}
7469 or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and hence has this behavior,
7470 you should define this macro.
7472 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7474 @findex INSN_REFERENCES_ARE_DELAYED
7475 @item INSN_REFERENCES_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7476 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7477 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7478 even if they appear to set or clobber a resource referenced in @var{insn}.
7479 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}. On machines where
7480 some @code{insn} or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and its operands
7481 are registers whose use is actually in the subroutine it calls, you should
7482 define this macro. Doing so allows the delay slot scheduler to move
7483 instructions which copy arguments into the argument registers into the delay
7486 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7488 @findex MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG
7489 @item MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG (@var{insn})
7490 In rare cases, correct code generation requires extra machine
7491 dependent processing between the second jump optimization pass and
7492 delayed branch scheduling. On those machines, define this macro as a C
7493 statement to act on the code starting at @var{insn}.
7495 @findex MULTIPLE_SYMBOL_SPACES
7496 @item MULTIPLE_SYMBOL_SPACES
7497 Define this macro if in some cases global symbols from one translation
7498 unit may not be bound to undefined symbols in another translation unit
7499 without user intervention. For instance, under Microsoft Windows
7500 symbols must be explicitly imported from shared libraries (DLLs).
7504 A C expression that returns how many instructions can be issued at the
7505 same time if the machine is a superscalar machine. This is only used by
7506 the @samp{Haifa} scheduler, and not the traditional scheduler.
7508 @findex MD_SCHED_INIT
7509 @item MD_SCHED_INIT (@var{file}, @var{verbose}
7510 A C statement which is executed by the @samp{Haifa} scheduler at the
7511 beginning of each block of instructions that are to be scheduled.
7512 @var{file} is either a null pointer, or a stdio stream to write any
7513 debug output to. @var{verbose} is the verbose level provided by
7514 @samp{-fsched-verbose-}@var{n}.
7516 @findex MD_SCHED_REORDER
7517 @item MD_SCHED_REORDER (@var{file}, @var{verbose}, @var{ready}, @var{n_ready})
7518 A C statement which is executed by the @samp{Haifa} scheduler after it
7519 has scheduled the ready list to allow the machine description to reorder
7520 it (for example to combine two small instructions together on
7521 @samp{VLIW} machines). @var{file} is either a null pointer, or a stdio
7522 stream to write any debug output to. @var{verbose} is the verbose level
7523 provided by @samp{-fsched-verbose-}@var{n}. @var{ready} is a pointer to
7524 the ready list of instructions that are ready to be scheduled.
7525 @var{n_ready} is the number of elements in the ready list. The
7526 scheduler reads the ready list in reverse order, starting with
7527 @var{ready}[@var{n_ready}-1] and going to @var{ready}[0].
7529 @findex MD_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE
7530 @item MD_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE (@var{file}, @var{verbose}, @var{insn}, @var{more})
7531 A C statement which is executed by the @samp{Haifa} scheduler after it
7532 has scheduled an insn from the ready list. @var{file} is either a null
7533 pointer, or a stdio stream to write any debug output to. @var{verbose}
7534 is the verbose level provided by @samp{-fsched-verbose-}@var{n}.
7535 @var{insn} is the instruction that was scheduled. @var{more} is the
7536 number of instructions that can be issued in the current cycle. The
7537 @samp{MD_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE} macro is responsible for updating the
7538 value of @var{more} (typically by @var{more}--).
7540 @findex MAX_INTEGER_COMPUTATION_MODE
7541 @item MAX_INTEGER_COMPUTATION_MODE
7542 Define this to the largest integer machine mode which can be used for
7543 operations other than load, store and copy operations.
7545 You need only define this macro if the target holds values larger than
7546 @code{word_mode} in general purpose registers. Most targets should not define
7549 @findex NEED_MATH_LIBRARY
7550 @item NEED_MATH_LIBRARY
7551 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if @code{g++} should
7552 automatically link in the math library or to zero if @code{g++} should not
7553 automatically link in the math library.
7555 You need only define this macro if the target does not always need the math
7556 library linked into C++ programs.